Camera User Guide


                O PY
• Before use, be sure to read this guide, including the
  safety precautions.


          C
• This guide will familiarize you with how to use the
  camera correctly.
• Keep the guide handy for future reference.




                                   ENGLISH
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera dealer.




         Camera                  Battery Pack NB-10L           Battery Charger
                                 (with terminal cover)         CB-2LC/CB-2LCE




      Interface Cable                  Neck Strap                   Lens Cap
        IFC-400PCU                      NS-DC9                     (with cord)




                                           PY
      Getting Started             DIGITAL CAMERA                Warranty Card
                                    Solution Disk
• A memory card is not included (see below).

    PDF Manuals

                                  C      O
For information about the included software, refer to the Software Guide, in
PDF format (p. 26).

      • Adobe Reader is required to view the PDF manuals.


    Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
• SD memory cards*
• SDHC memory cards*
• SDXC memory cards*
• Eye-Fi cards
* Conforms to SD specifications. However, not all memory cards have been verified to
  work with the camera.




2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information


  About Eye-Fi Cards
This product is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions (including
wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi card, please check with
the card manufacturer.
Also note that an approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries
or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear
whether the card has been approved for use in the area, please check with
the card manufacturer.
     • Always confirm beforehand that memory cards are supported on other devices
       such as card readers and computers (including the current version of your
       operating system).

    Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
• Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were
  recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and




                                     PY
  affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages
  arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory
  cards, that results in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be


                                   O
  recorded in a way that is machine readable.



                            C
• Images recorded by the camera are intended for personal use. Refrain
  from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that
  even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other
  legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial
  settings.
• The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
  camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
  contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
• Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
  manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design
  specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear
  as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or affect
  recorded images.
• The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection
  against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before
  using the camera.
• When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm.
  This does not indicate damage.


                                                                                    3
Part Names and Conventions in This
     Guide




    Front dial                            Mode dial
    Lamp                                  Exposure compensation dial
    Lens                                  Hot shoe
    Zoom lever                                 (Pop up flash) switch




                                          PY
    Shooting: i (telephoto) /             Flash
    j (wide angle)                        Speaker
    Playback: k (magnify) / g (index)     Ring release button



                                        O
    Strap mount                           DC coupler cable port




                                 C
    Shutter button                        Memory card/battery cover
    Power button/lamp                     Tripod socket

• In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
  buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
• The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
  z Front dial       on front
   o Up button        on back
   q Left button       on back
   7 Control dial       on back
  m FUNC./SET button           on back
   r Right button        on back
   p Down button         on back
• On-screen text is indicated in brackets.
•     : Important information you should know
•     : Notes and tips for expert camera use
• (p. xx): Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a
  page number)
• Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.

4
Part Names and Conventions in This Guide




       (Shortcut) / c (Direct print) button   Remote terminal
   + (AE lock/FE lock) / d (Jump) button      HDMITM terminal
       (AF Frame Selector) /                  n button
   a (Single image erase) button                  (Metering) button




                                        PY
   Screen (LCD monitor)                       ISO speed / Up button
   Diopter adjustment dial                    e (Macro) / f (Manual focus) /
   Viewfinder                                 Left button



                                      O
   Microphone                                 Control dial
   Indicator                                  FUNC./SET button



                               C
   1 (Playback) button                        h (Flash) / Right button
   Movie button                               l (Display) / Down button
   AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
   DIGITAL terminal
                                    Turning the control dial is one way to choose
                                    setting items, switch images, and perform
                                    other operations. Most of these operations
                                    are also possible with the opqr buttons.

• For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
  “the memory card” .
• The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still
  images, movies, or both.
      Still Images : Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
                     viewing still images.
        Movies     : Indicates that the function is used when shooting or
                     viewing movies.



                                                                                5
Contents
Package Contents .............................2           Special Modes for Other
Compatible Memory Cards ................2                  Purposes....................................... 81
Preliminary Notes and Legal                               Shooting Various Movies ................ 88
  Information.......................................3
Part Names and Conventions in                              4 G mode .............................91
  This Guide .......................................4
                                                          Shooting in Program AE Mode
Contents ............................................6
                                                           (G Mode) ...................................... 92
Contents: Basic Operations ...............8
                                                          Image Brightness (Exposure
Safety Precautions...........................10            Compensation).............................. 93
Initial Preparations ...........................13        Color and Continuous Shooting .... 100
Trying the Camera Out ....................21              Shooting Range and Focusing...... 105
Included Software, PDF Manuals ....26                     Flash ............................................. 116
Accessories .....................................32       Shooting RAW Images.................. 119
                                                          Other Settings ............................... 120
 1 Camera Basics .................35
                                                           5 Tv, Av, M, C1, C2 Mode..123


                                                            PY
On/Off ..............................................36
Shutter Button..................................37        Specific Shutter Speeds
Optical Viewfinder............................38           (Tv Mode).................................... 124
Shooting Modes...............................39
Shooting Display Options ................39


                                              C
FUNC. Menu....................................40
n Menu ....................................41
                                                          O
                                                          Specific Aperture Values
                                                           (Av Mode) ................................... 125
                                                          Specific Shutter Speeds and
                                                           Aperture Values (M Mode).......... 126
Indicator Display ..............................42        Customization for Shooting
Clock................................................42    Styles .......................................... 128


 2 Smart Auto Mode .............43                         6 Playback Mode ...............135
Shooting in Smart Auto Mode..........44                   Viewing.......................................... 136
Common, Convenient Features.......51                      Browsing and Filtering Images...... 141
Image Customization Features........56                    Image Viewing Options ................. 145
Helpful Shooting Features ...............62               Protecting Images ......................... 148
Customizing Camera Operation ......65                     Erasing Images ............................. 152
                                                          Rotating Images ............................ 155
                                                          Image Categories.......................... 157
 3 Other Shooting Modes.....67
                                                          Editing Still Images........................ 160
Specific Scenes ...............................68         Editing Movies............................... 165
Image Effects (Creative Filters) .......71


6
Contents

                                                      Printing Images ............................. 202
 7 Setting Menu ..................167
                                                      Using an Eye-Fi Card .................... 212
Adjusting Basic Camera
 Functions .................................... 168
                                                       9 Appendix.........................215
 8 Accessories....................181                 Troubleshooting............................. 216
                                                      On-Screen Messages.................... 220
Tips on Using Included
                                                      On-Screen Information .................. 222
 Accessories ................................ 182
                                                      Functions and Menu Tables .......... 226
Optional Accessories .................... 182
                                                      Handling Precautions .................... 236
Using Optional Accessories .......... 186
                                                      Index.............................................. 237




                                               O PY
                                      C



                                                                                                          7
Contents: Basic Operations

4 Shoot
    Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode) ............................. 44

    Shooting people well

           I
         Portraits
                                V
                             Kids and Pets
                                                         w
                                                       At the Beach
                                                                             P
                                                                          Against Snow
          (p. 68)               (p. 68)                    (p. 69)           (p. 70)



    Matching specific scenes

        J
        Landscape                            Sports                    Night Scenes
          (p. 68)                            (p. 69)                      (p. 69)




                                                 PY
          S
        Under Water
                                         O                               t
                                                                        Fireworks



                                               O
                                             Foliage
          (p. 69)                            (p. 70)                     (p. 70)



    Applying special effects


        Vivid Colors
                                    C
                             Poster Effect             “Aged” Photos     Fish-Eye Effect
           (p. 71)             (p. 71)                    (p. 73)            (p. 74)



      Miniature Effect    Toy Camera Effect            Monochrome
          (p. 74)              (p. 76)                   (p. 77)


    Focus on faces ....................................................... 44, 68, 108, 113
    Without using the flash (Flash Off) ......................................... 22, 45
    With myself in the shot (Self-Timer)........................................ 52, 84
    Add the shooting date and time (Date Stamp).............................. 54
    Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)........................... 81



8
Contents: Basic Operations



1 View
 View images (Playback Mode) ................................................... 136
 Automatic playback (Slideshow)................................................. 146
 On a TV ...................................................................................... 186
 On a computer.............................................................................. 26
 Browse through images quickly.................................................. 141
 Erase images.............................................................................. 152


E Shoot/View Movies
 Shoot movies.......................................................................... 44, 88
 View movies ............................................................................... 136


c     Print


                                         O PY
 Print pictures............................................................................... 202


      Save                      C
 Save images to a computer.......................................................... 29




                                                                                                  9
Safety Precautions
• Before using the product, please ensure that you read the safety precautions described
  below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
• The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended to prevent injuries to
  yourself and other persons, or damage to the equipment.
• Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use.

           Warning               Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.


• Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight. In particular,
remain at least one meter (39 inches) away from infants when using the flash.
• Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation.
•  Use only recommended power sources.
•  Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product.
•  Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
•  To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if it has been
   dropped or otherwise damaged.




                                             PY
• Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange smell, or
   otherwise behaves abnormally.
• Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product.




                                           O
• Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water) or other liquids.
• Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera.



                                    C
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior, immediately turn
the camera off and remove the battery.
If the battery charger becomes wet, unplug it from the outlet and consult your camera
distributor or a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
• Do not look through the viewfinder at bright light sources (such as the sun on a
  clear day).
This could damage your eyesight.
• Use only the recommended battery.
• Do not place the battery near or in direct flame.
• Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe away any dust
  and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power outlet, and the
  surrounding area.
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the
  electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if the power cord or plug are
  damaged, or not fully plugged into the outlet.
• Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact the terminals
  or plug.
The battery may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock or fire. This could cause
injury and damage the surroundings. In the event that a battery leaks and the battery
electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water.

10
Safety Precautions


• Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of
electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate caution when using the
camera in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes
and medical facilities.
• Do not play the supplied CD-ROM(s) in any CD player that does not support data
   CD-ROMs.
It is possible to suffer hearing loss from listening with headphones to the loud sounds of
a CD-ROM played on an audio CD player (music player). Additionally, this could damage
the speakers.


           Caution             Denotes the possibility of injury.

• When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject it to
  strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects.
• Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.




                                         PY
• When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.




                                       O
• Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places:
  - Places subject to strong sunlight



                               C
  - Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
  - Humid or dusty areas
These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery, resulting in
electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries.
High temperatures may cause deformation of the camera or battery charger casing.
• Viewing images on the camera screen for prolonged periods may cause
  discomfort.


                               Denotes the possibility of damage to
       Caution                 the equipment.

• Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a clear day).
Doing so may damage the image sensor.
• When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful not to allow
  dust or sand to enter the camera.
This may cause the product to malfunction.




                                                                                      11
Safety Precautions


• In regular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the flash.
This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign materials stuck to the
front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove dirt, dust or other foreign matter from
the flash to prevent heat build-up and damage to the unit.
• Remove and store the battery when you are not using the camera.
If the battery is left inside the camera, damage caused by leakage may occur.
• Before you discard the battery, cover the terminals with tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
• Unplug the battery charger from the power outlet after charging is complete, or
  when you are not using it.
• Do not place anything, such as cloth, on top of the battery charger while it is
  charging.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort,
resulting in fire.
• Do not place the battery near pets.
Pets biting the battery could cause leakage, overheating or explosion, resulting in fire or
damage.




                                               PY
• When putting the camera in your bag, close the screen to face inward to ensure
  that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen.
• Do not attach any hard objects to the camera.



                                             O
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.




                                     C



12
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.

   Attaching Accessories
                               Attach the strap.
                               Attach the included strap to the camera as
                               shown.
                               On the other side of the camera, attach the
                               strap the same way.



                               Attach the lens cap to the strap.
                               Remove the lens cap from the lens and
                               attach the lens cap cord to the strap.
                               Always remove the lens cap before turning




                                     PY
                               the camera on. Try attaching the lens cap to
                               the neck strap when the cap is not in use.
                               Keep the lens cap on the lens when the



                                   O
                               camera is not in use.




   Holding the Camera
                           C
                               Place the strap around your neck.
                               When shooting, keep your arms close to your
                               body and hold the camera securely to
                               prevent it from moving. If you have raised the
                               flash, do not rest your fingers on it.




                                                                          13
Initial Preparations



     Charging the Battery
Before use, charge the battery with the included charger. Be sure to charge
the battery initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery charged.

                                Remove the cover.




                                Insert the battery.
                                After aligning the o marks on the battery and
                                charger, insert the battery by pushing it in
                                ( ) and down ( ).




                                        PY
                                Charge the battery.
                                For CB-2LC: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug



                                      O
                                the charger into a power outlet ( ).



                               C
                                For CB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the
               CB-2LC           charger, then plug the other end into a power
                                outlet.
               CB-2LCE
                                The charging lamp turns orange and
                                charging begins.
                                When the charging is finished, the lamp turns
                                green.

                                Remove the battery.
                                After unplugging the battery charger, remove
                                the battery by pushing it in ( ) and up ( ).




14
Initial Preparations



     • To protect the battery and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge
       it continuously for more than 24 hours.
     • For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the charger
       or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or
       damage to the product.

     • For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time
       possible with a fully charged battery, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started
       guide.


   Inserting the Battery and Memory Card
Insert the included battery and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted in
another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
(p. 171).




                                        PY
                                    Check the card’s write-protect tab.


                                      O
                                    Recording is not possible on memory cards
                                    with a write-protect tab when the tab is in the


                               C    locked (downward) position. Slide the tab up
                                    until it clicks into the unlocked position.
                                    Open the cover.
                                    Slide the switch (      ) and open the cover
                                    ( ).




                                    Insert the battery.
                                    While pressing the battery lock in the
                                    direction of the arrow, insert the battery
                                    facing as shown and push it in until it clicks
                                    into the locked position.


  Terminals    Battery Lock


                                                                                       15
Initial Preparations


                               If you insert the battery facing the wrong way,
                               cannot be locked into the correct position.
                               Always confirm that the battery is facing the
                               right way and locks when inserted.
                               Insert the memory card.
                               Insert the memory card facing as shown until
                               it clicks into the locked position.
                               Make sure the memory card is facing the right
                               way when you insert it. Inserting memory
                               cards facing the wrong way may damage the
                       Label   camera.
                               Close the cover.
                               Lower the cover in the direction of the arrow
                               and press it until it clicks into the closed




                                      PY
                               position.




                               C    O
 Removing the Battery and Memory Card
                               Remove the battery.
                               Open the cover and press the battery lock in
                               the direction of the arrow.
                               The battery will pop up.
                               Remove the memory card.
                               Push the memory card in until it clicks, and
                               then slowly release it.
                               The memory card will pop up.




16
Initial Preparations



Using the Screen
                               Prepare the screen for use.
                               Open the screen ( ) and rotate it toward the
                               lens 180° ( ).
                               Close the screen in this orientation ( ).



  • The screen can only open to approximately 175° in direction         . Be
    careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will damage
    the camera.

Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
                               You can adjust the angle and orientation of
                               the screen as needed, to suit shooting




                                    PY
                               conditions.
                               To protect the screen when the camera is not



                                  O
                               in use, always keep it closed and facing the
                               camera body.


    able to shoot a movie.C
  • If the screen is closed and facing the camera body, you will not be


  • When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image of yourself by
    rotating the screen around toward the front of the camera. To cancel reverse
    display, press the n button, choose [Reverse Disp.] on the 4 tab, and
    press the qr buttons to choose [Off].




                                                                               17
Initial Preparations



     Setting the Date and Time
A screen for setting the date and time is displayed the first time you turn the
camera on. Be sure to specify the date and time, which is the basis for dates
and times added to your images.

                                Turn the camera on.
                                Press the power button.
                                The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.


                                Set the date and time.
                                Press the qr buttons to choose an option.
                                Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                specify the date and time.
                                When finished, press the m button.




                                      O PY
                               CSet the local time zone.
                                Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                choose your local time zone.




                                Finish the setup process.
                                Press the m button when finished. After a
                                confirmation message, the setting screen is
                                no longer displayed.
                                To turn off the camera, press the power
                                button.



18
Initial Preparations



     • Unless you set the date, time, and local time zone, the [Date/Time]
       screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify
       the correct information.

     • To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose    in step 2 and then
       choose      by pressing the op buttons or turning the 7 dial.


  Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.

                                   Access the camera menu.
                                   Press the n button.




                                       PY
                                   Choose [Date/Time].
                                   Move the zoom lever to choose the 3 tab.



                                     O
                                   Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   choose [Date/Time], and then press the m


                              C    button.

                                   Change the date and time.
                                   Follow step 2 on p. 18 to adjust the settings.
                                   Press the n button to close the menu.




     • Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in
       date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed.
     • The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a charged
       battery or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold separately, p. 182),
       even if the camera is left off.
     • Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed
       when you turn the camera on. Follow the steps on p. 18 to set the date and time.




                                                                                    19
Initial Preparations



     Display Language
The display language can be changed as needed.

                                   Enter Playback mode.
                                   Press the 1 button.



                                   Access the setting screen.
                                   Press and hold the m button, and then
                                   immediately press the n button.


                                   Set the display language.




                                           PY
                                   Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                   to choose a language, and then press the m
                                   button.




                                  C      O
                                   Once the display language has been set, the
                                   setting screen is no longer displayed.




      • A clock icon is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the m
        button before you press the n button. In this case, press the m button to
        dismiss the clock icon and repeat step 2.
      • You can also change the display language by pressing the n button and
        choosing [Language ] on the 3 tab.




20
Still Images        Movies

    Trying the Camera Out
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies,
and then view them.

   Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply
let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

                                 Turn the camera on.
                                 Press the power button.
                                 The startup screen is displayed.


                                 Enter A mode.
                                 Set the mode dial to A.




                                     PY
                                 Aim the camera at the subject. As the camera
                                 determines the scene, it will make a slight
                                 clicking noise.




                            C      O
                                 Icons representing the scene and image
                                 stabilization mode are displayed in the upper
                                 right of the screen.
                                 Frames displayed around any subjects that
                                 are detected indicate that they are in focus.


                                 Compose the shot.
                                 To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the
                                 zoom lever toward i (telephoto), and to
                                 zoom away from the subject, move it toward
                                 j (wide angle).




                                                                              21
Trying the Camera Out


                        Shoot.
                        Shooting Still Images
                          Focus.
                        Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
                        down. The camera beeps twice after
                        focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
                        indicate image areas in focus.




       AF Frames




                                PY
                        If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
                        move the         switch to raise the flash. It will



                              O
                        fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the
                        flash, push it down with your finger, into the


                        C
                        camera.
                           Shoot.
                        Press the shutter button all the way down.
                        As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is
                        played, and in low-light conditions when you
                        have raised the flash, it fires automatically.
                        Your shot remains displayed on the screen
                        for about two seconds.
                        Even while the shot is displayed, you can
                        take another shot by pressing the shutter
                        button again.




22
Trying the Camera Out


               Shooting Movies
                 Start shooting.
               If the flash is already up, push it down with
               your finger, into the camera.
Elapsed Time   Press the movie button. The camera beeps
               once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
               displayed with the elapsed time.
               Black bars displayed on the top and bottom
               edges of the screen indicate image areas not
               recorded.
               Once recording begins, you can take your
               finger off the movie button.

                   Finish shooting.




                     PY
               Press the movie button again to stop
               shooting. The camera beeps twice as
               recording stops.




               C   O
               Recording will stop automatically when the
               memory card becomes full.




                                                         23
Trying the Camera Out



     Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows.

                               Enter Playback mode.
                               Press the 1 button.
                               Your last shot is displayed.


                               Browse through your images.
                               To view the previous image, press the q
                               button or turn the 7 dial counterclockwise.
                               To view the next image, press the r button or
                               turn the 7 dial clockwise.
                               Press and hold the qr buttons to browse




                                      PY
                               through images quickly. Images appear
                               grainy at this time.




                              C     O
                               To access Scroll Display mode, turn the 7
                               dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the 7 dial to
                               browse through images.
                               To return to single-image display, press the
                               m button.
                               To browse images grouped by shooting date,
                               press the op buttons in Scroll Display
                               mode.
                               Movies are identified by a         icon. To play
                               movies, go to step 3.




24
Trying the Camera Out


                                 Play movies.
                                 Press the m button to access the movie
                                 control panel, choose       (either press the
                                 qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press
                                 the m button again.
                                 Playback now begins, and after the movie is
                                 finished,        is displayed.
                                 To adjust the volume, press the op buttons.

    • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
      halfway.


  Erasing the Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.




                                      PY
                                 Choose an image to erase.
                                 Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to




                            C       O
                                 choose an image.
                                 Erase the images.
                                 Press the a button.
                                 After [Erase?] is displayed, press the qr
                                 buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Erase],
                                 and then press the m button.
                                 The current image is now erased.
                                 To cancel erasure, press the qr buttons or
                                 turn the 7 dial to choose [Cancel], and then
                                 press the m button.




    • You can also erase all images at once (p. 152).




                                                                                25
Included Software, PDF Manuals
The software and PDF manuals on the included CD-ROM are introduced
below, with instructions for installation, saving images to a computer, and
using the PDF manuals.

     Features of the Included Software
After installing the software on the CD-ROM, you can do the following things
on your computer.

                                   ZoomBrowser EX
                                   ImageBrowser
                                   Import images and change camera settings
                                   Manage images: browse, search, and
                                   organize
                                   Print and edit images
                                   Digital Photo Professional



                                           PY
                                   Browse, process and edit RAW images

     PDF Manuals


                                  C      O
The following PDF manuals are provided on the included CD-ROM.




Software Guide                               Camera User Guide
Refer to the software guide when using the   Once you are familiar with the information
included software. Windows and               in Getting Started, refer to this guide for a
Macintosh versions are provided.             more in-depth understanding of camera
                                             operation.




26
Included Software, PDF Manuals



   System Requirements
The included software can be used on the following computers. Adobe
Reader is required to view the PDF manuals.
Windows
                 Windows 7 (including SP1)
Operating System Windows Vista SP2
                 Windows XP SP3
                   Computers running one of the above operating systems
Computer
                   (preinstalled), with an included USB port
                   Pentium 1.3 GHz or higher (still images), Core 2 Duo 2.6 GHz or
Processor
                   higher (movies)
                   Windows 7 (64 bit): 2 GB or more
RAM                Windows 7 (32 bit), Windows Vista (64 bit, 32 bit),
                   Windows XP: 1 GB or more (still images), 2 GB or more (movies)




                                        PY
Interfaces         USB
Free Hard Disk
                   620 MB or more*
Space
Display



                              C       O
                   1024 x 768 resolution or higher

* In Windows XP, Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0 or later (max. 500 MB) must be installed.
  Installation may take some time, depending on computer performance.

Macintosh
Operating System Mac OS X 10.5 – 10.6
                   Computers running one of the above operating systems
Computer
                   (preinstalled), with an included USB port
Processor          Intel Processor (still images), Core 2 Duo 2.6 GHz or higher (movies)
RAM                1 GB or more (still images), 2 GB or more (movies)
Interfaces         USB
Free Hard Disk
                   680 MB or more
Space
Display            1024 x 768 resolution or higher

      • Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including
        supported OS versions.



                                                                                    27
Included Software, PDF Manuals



     Installing the Software and PDF Manuals
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.

                              Insert the CD-ROM in the
                              computer’s CD-ROM drive.
                              Insert the included CD-ROM (DIGITAL
                              CAMERA Solution Disk) (p. 2) in the
                              computer’s CD-ROM drive.
                              On a Macintosh computer, after inserting the
                              disc, double-click the desktop disc icon to
                              open it, and then double-click the      icon
                              displayed.
                              Install the files.




                                     PY
                              In Windows, click [Easy Installation], or on a
                              Macintosh computer, click [Install]. Follow the
                              on-screen instructions to complete the


                                   O
                              installation process.



                             C
                              If the [User Account Control] window is
                              displayed in Windows, follow the on-screen
                              instructions.
                              Complete the installation.
                              In Windows, click [Restart] or [Finish] and
                              remove the CD-ROM after the desktop is
                              displayed.
                              On a Macintosh computer, click [Finish] on
                              the screen after installation and remove the
                              CD-ROM when the desktop is displayed.




28
Included Software, PDF Manuals



   Saving Images to a Computer
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration.

                              Connect the camera to the
                              computer.
                              Make sure the camera is off.
                              Open the cover ( ). With the smaller plug of
                              the included interface cable (p. 2) in the
                              orientation shown, insert the plug fully into
                              the camera terminal ( ).
                              Insert the larger plug of the interface cable in
                              the computer’s USB port. For details about
                              USB connections on the computer, refer to
                              the computer user manual.




                                O PY
                              Turn the camera on to access
                              CameraWindow.


                          C
                              Press the 1 button to turn the camera on.
                              On a Macintosh computer, CameraWindow is
                              displayed when a connection is established
                              between the camera and computer.
                              For Windows, follow the steps introduced
                              below.
                              In the screen that displays, click the   link
                              to modify the program.




                                                                           29
Included Software, PDF Manuals


                             Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
                             Camera using Canon CameraWindow] and
                             then click [OK].




                             Double click   .




CameraWindow                 Save the images to the computer.



                                    PY
                             Click [Import Images from Camera], and then
                             click [Import Untransferred Images].


                                  O
                             Images are now saved to the Pictures folder



                            C
                             on the computer, in separate folders named
                             by date.
                             After images are saved, close
                             CameraWindow, press the 1 button to turn
                             the camera off, and unplug the cable.
                             For instructions on viewing images on a
                             computer, refer to the Software Guide.




30
Included Software, PDF Manuals


     • In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the   icon in the
       taskbar.
     • To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images
       From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow] on the screen displayed
       when you turn the camera on in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click
       the [Start] menu and choose [All Programs] [Canon Utilities]
       [CameraWindow] [CameraWindow].
     • On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click
       the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop).
     • Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera
       to the computer without using the included software, the following limitations
       apply.
       - It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until
         camera images are accessible.
       - Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation.
       - RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be
         saved.
       - Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer.
       - Some problems may occur when saving images or image information,




                                       PY
         depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file
         sizes.
       - Some functions provided by the included software may not be available, such



                                     O
         as editing movies or returning images to the camera.


   Using the PDF Manuals
                              C
You can access the PDF manuals by double-clicking the desktop shortcut
icons created when the included CD-ROM is used for installation.
Adobe Reader is required to view the PDF manuals.




                                                                                    31
Accessories

 Included
 Accessories
                       Lens Cap          Battery Pack      Battery Charger     DIGITAL
     Neck Strap       (with cord)          NB-10L*1           CB-2LC/         CAMERA
      NS-DC9                         (with terminal cover)   CB-2LCE*1       Solution Disk




                                          Interface Cable IFC-400PCU*1




        Power
                                    Memory Card           Card Reader                Windows/
                                                                                     Macintosh




                                                    PY
                                                                                     Computer

                                                     Cables
     AC Adapter Kit
      ACK-DC80



                                          C       O
                                               HDMI Cable HTC-100

                                                                                      TV/Video
                                                                                       System
                                         Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST



*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 and Off-Camera Shoe Cord
   OC-E3 are also supported.
*3 Bracket BKT-DC1, Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3, Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 are
   required to attach these accessories.
*4 Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 is required to attach this accessory.
*5 Requires Waterproof Case Weight WW-DC1.
*6 Filter Adapter FA-DC58C is required to attach this accessory.



CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

32
Accessories


                                          Flash Units




           Speedlite*2                  Macro Twin Lite            Macro Ring Lite
        580EX II, 430EX II,              MT-24EX*3                  MR-14EX*4
         320EX, 270EX II


                                            Cases




                      Waterproof Case                      Soft Case
                       WP-DC44 *5                          SC-DC75

                                     Lens Accessories




                                          PY
                Canon-brand Lens Filter                    Lens Hood
                    (58 mm dia.)*6                          LH-DC70




                                        O
                         Canon PictBridge-Compatible Printers



                               C
                                    Other Accessories


                                   Remote Switch RS60-E3


Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine
Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire,
etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/
or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs
arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may
request such repairs on a chargeable basis.




                                                                                      33
Accessories




                  O PY
              C



34
1
Camera Basics
 Basic camera operations and features




                      O PY
                 C



                                        35
On/Off
                                    Shooting Mode
                                    Press the power button to turn the camera on
                                    and prepare for shooting.
                                    To turn the camera off, press the power
                                    button again.
                                    Playback Mode
                                    Press the 1 button to turn the camera on
                                    and view your shots.
                                    To turn the camera off, press the 1 button
                                    again.

      • To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the 1 button.
      • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
        halfway (p. 37).
      • The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback




                                             PY
        mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by pressing the
        1 button.




                                           O
     Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)


                                   C
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity.
  Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but
the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (p. 37).
  Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity.
      • You can deactivate these power-saving features if you prefer (p. 174).
      • You can also adjust the timing of screen deactivation (p. 174).




36
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always press the shutter button lightly
(halfway) initially. Once the subject is in focus, press the button all the way
down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the button
halfway or all the way down.

                                Press halfway. (Press lightly to
                                focus.)
                                Press the shutter button halfway. The camera
                                beeps twice, and AF frames are displayed
                                around image areas in focus.


                                Press all the way down. (From the
                                halfway position, press fully to
                                shoot.)



                                    PY
                                The camera shoots, as a shutter sound is
                                played.



                                  O
                                Keep the camera still until the shutter sound
                                ends.


                            C
     • Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the
       shutter button halfway.
     • Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
       required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
       and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
       moves) before the shutter sound ends.




                                                                            37
Optical Viewfinder
To conserve battery power when shooting, you can use the optical viewfinder
instead of the screen. Shoot the same way as when using the screen.

                                   Deactivate the screen.
                                   Press the p button to turn the screen off
                                   (p. 39).
                                   Adjust the diopter.
                                   As you look through the optical viewfinder,
                                   turn the dial one way or the other so that
                                   images look sharp.

     • The area visible in the optical viewfinder may differ slightly from the
       image area in your shots.
     • At aspect ratios other than 4:3, the area visible in the optical
       viewfinder differs from the image area in your shots. Check the




                                           PY
       settings before shooting.

     • The lens may be partially visible through the optical viewfinder at some zoom



                                         O
       positions.
     • Although the camera automatically focuses on subjects, face detection and



                                 C
       focusing is not possible.




38
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings (pp. 21, 44).
                                                                 P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and
Scene Mode                                                       C2 Modes
Shoot with optimal settings for specific                         Take a variety of shots
scenes (p. 68).                                                  using your preferred
                                                                 settings (pp. 91, 123).
          Creative Filters Mode                    Movie Mode
          Add a variety of effects to images       For shooting movies (p. 88).
          when shooting (p. 71).                   You can also shoot movies when the
                                                   mode dial is not set to Movie mode,
                                                   simply by pressing the movie button.



    Shooting Display Options


                                         PY
Press the p button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the
information. For details on the information displayed, see p. 222.




                               C
       No information is displayed
                                       O
                                      Information is               Off
                Display 1               displayed
                                        Display 2



      • Even if the screen is off, it will turn on when you start shooting a
        movie.

      • Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function when
        you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots are
        composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the
        brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky
        subject motion will not affect recorded images.
      • For playback display options, see p. 138.




                                                                                     39
FUNC. Menu
Configure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(pp. 226 – 233).

                                  Access the FUNC. menu.
                                  Press the m button.



                                  Choose a menu item.
                                  Press the op buttons to choose a menu
                                  item.
                                  Available options are shown at the bottom of
                                  the screen.
                                  In some menu items, functions can be
                                  specified simply by pressing the m or r




                                          PY
             Options              button, or another screen is displayed for
Menu Items                        configuring the function.




                                 C      O
                                  Choose an option.
                                  Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose an option.
                                  Options labeled with a     icon can be
                                  configured by pressing the n button.
                                  Finish the setup process.
                                  Press the m button.
                                  The screen before you pressed the m button
                                  in step 1 is displayed again, showing the
                                  option you configured.

     • To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
       settings (p. 179).




40
n Menu
Configure a variety of camera functions through other menus as follows. Menu
items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting (4), playback (1),
and so on. Note that available settings vary depending on the selected shooting
or playback mode (pp. 230 – 235).

                                  Access the menu.
                                  Press the n button.



                                  Choose a tab.
                                  Move the zoom lever or press the qr buttons
                                  to choose a tab.

                                  Choose a setting.
                                  Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to




                                      PY
                                  choose a setting.
                                  To choose settings with options not shown,
                                  first press the m or r button to switch



                                    O
                                  screens, and then either press the op
                                  buttons or turn the 7 dial to select the


                             C    setting.
                                  Press the n button to restore the
                                  previous screen.
                                  Choose an option.
                                  Press the qr buttons to choose an option.

                                  Finish the setup process.
                                  Press the n button to return to the screen
                                  displayed before you pressed the n
                                  button in step 1.




     • To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default
       settings (p. 179).


                                                                                 41
Indicator Display
The power lamp and indicator on the back of the camera (p. 5) will light or
blink depending on the camera’s status.
                         Indicator
  Indicator     Color                                Camera Status
                           Status

                            On       Camera on
Power Lamp      Green
                          Blinking   Low battery
                            On       Ready to shoot (when the flash is deactivated)

                Green                Recording/reading/transmitting images
                          Blinking   Distance warning (p. 217), or cannot focus (when
  Indicator                          the flash is deactivated) (p. 217)

                            On       Ready to shoot (when the flash is activated)
               Orange                Distance warning (p. 217), or cannot focus (when
                          Blinking
                                     the flash is activated) (p. 217)




                                          PY
     • When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the
       memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may
       corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.


     Clock
You can check the current time.
                                 C      O
                                 Press and hold the m button.
                                 The current time appears.
                                 If you hold the camera vertically while using
                                 the clock function, it will switch to vertical
                                 display. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7
                                 dial to change the display color.
                                 Press the m button again to cancel the clock
                                 display.




     • When the camera is off, press and hold the m button, then press the power
       button to display the clock.


42
2
Smart Auto Mode
 Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
 over shooting



                      O PY
                  C



                                                   43
Still Images        Movies

     Shooting in Smart Auto Mode
For fully automatic selection at optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let
the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.

                                 Turn the camera on.
                                 Press the power button.
                                 The startup screen is displayed.


                                 Enter A mode.
                                 Set the mode dial to A.
                                 Aim the camera at the subject. The camera
                                 will make a slight clicking noise as it
                                 determines the scene.
                                 Icons representing the scene and image
                                 stabilization mode are displayed in the upper




                                         PY
                                 right of the screen (pp. 48, 49).
                                 Frames displayed around any detected
                                 subjects indicate that they are in focus.




                                C      O
                                 Compose the shot.
                                 To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the
                                 zoom lever toward i (telephoto), and to
                                 zoom away from the subject, move it toward
      Zoom Bar                   j (wide angle). (A zoom bar showing the
                                 zoom position is displayed.)



Focus Range (approx.)

                                 Shoot.
                                 Shooting Still Images
                                   Focus.
                                 Press the shutter button halfway. The camera
                                 beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are
                                 displayed to indicate image areas in focus.

44
Shooting in Smart Auto Mode


               Several AF frames are displayed when
               multiple areas are in focus.




 AF Frames
               If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen,
               move the         switch to raise the flash. It will
               fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the
               flash, push it down with your finger, into the
               camera.
                   Shoot.



                     PY
               Press the shutter button all the way down.
               As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is
               played, and in low-light conditions when you


                   O
               have raised the flash, it fires automatically.



               C
               Your shot remains displayed on the screen
               for about two seconds.
               Even while the shot is displayed, you can
               take another shot by pressing the shutter
               button again.
               Shooting Movies
                 Start shooting.
               If the flash is already up, push it down with
               your finger, into the camera.
Elapsed Time   Press the movie button. The camera beeps
               once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
               displayed with the elapsed time.
               Black bars displayed on the top and bottom
               edges of the screen indicate image areas not
               recorded.
               Once recording begins, you can take your
               finger off the movie button.

                                                               45
Shooting in Smart Auto Mode


                                   Resize the subject and
                                  recompose the shot as needed.
                               To resize the subject, do the same thing as in
                               step 3 on p. 44.
                               However, note that the sound of camera
                               operations will be recorded.
                               When you recompose shots, the focus,
                               brightness, and colors will be automatically
                               adjusted.
                                   Finish shooting.
                               Press the movie button again to stop
                               shooting. The camera beeps twice as
                               recording stops.
                               Recording will stop automatically when the




                                       PY
                               memory card becomes full.
 Still Images/Movies


       press the p button (p. 39).
                                     O
     • To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is blank,


                              C
     • To restore camera sound if you have accidentally deactivated it (by
       holding the p button down while turning the camera on), press the
       n button and choose [Mute] on the 3 tab, and then press the
       qr buttons to choose [Off].

 Still Images

     • A flashing      icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred
       by camera shake. In this case, attach the camera to a tripod or take
       other measures to keep it still.
     • If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
       subject. For details on the flash range, see “Specifications” in the
       Getting Started guide.
     • The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you
       press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing range
       (shooting range), see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.
     • To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
       activated when shooting in low-light conditions.

46
Shooting in Smart Auto Mode


 • A blinking h icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that
   shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging.
   Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press
   the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press
   it again.

 • The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically
   attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi-
   area White Balance).

Movies

          Microphone              • Before shooting a movie, lower the flash
                                    with your finger. Be careful not to touch
                                    the microphone when shooting a movie.
                                    Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the
                                    microphone may prevent audio from




                                    PY
                                    being recorded or may cause the
                                    recording to sound muffled.




                                  O
 • Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
   shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
   recorded.

                          C
 • To correct suboptimal image color that may occur in      movie
   shooting (p. 60) after you recompose shots, press the movie button
   to stop recording, and then press it again to resume recording.

 • Audio is recorded in stereo.




                                                                              47
Shooting in Smart Auto Mode



     Scene Icons
In A mode, shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by
the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are automatically selected for
optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
     Subject             People                    Other Subjects                Icon
                                                                              Background
                           In       Shadows                In      At Close
                         Motion*1   on Face*1           Motion*1    Range        Color
Background

Bright
                                                                                Gray
     Backlit                            —

With Blue
Sky
                                                                              Light Blue




                                              PY
     Backlit                            —




                                            O
Sunsets                    —                                         —         Orange




                                    C
Spotlights


Dark                                                                          Dark Blue

     Tripod         *2                             *2
                                    —                          —
     Used

*1 Not displayed for movies.
*2 Displayed in dark scenes when the camera is held still, as when mounted on a tripod.

       • Try shooting in G mode (p. 91) if the scene icon does not match
         actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your
         expected effect, color, or brightness.




48
Shooting in Smart Auto Mode


   Image Stabilization Icons
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in A
mode.
                                                         Image stabilization for movies,
         Image stabilization for still                   reducing strong camera shake,
         images                                          as when shooting while walking
                                                         (Dynamic IS)

                                                         Image stabilization for subtle
         Image stabilization for still                   camera shake, such as when
         images, when panning*                           shooting movies at telephoto
                                                         (Powered IS)

                                                         No image stabilization, because
         Image stabilization for macro
                                                         the camera is mounted on a
         shots (Hybrid IS)
                                                         tripod or held still by other means




                                           PY
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow
  subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera




                                         O
  shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving
  vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.



                                 C
      • To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120). In this case, an IS
        icon is not displayed.




                                                                                          49
Shooting in Smart Auto Mode


     On-Screen Frames
A variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are
aiming the camera at.
• A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
  determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
  displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
  within a certain range to keep them in focus.
  However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame
  will remain on the screen.
• When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects
  subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and image
  brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).

      • Try shooting in G mode (p. 91) if no frames are displayed, if frames
        are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are displayed




                                        PY
        on the background or similar areas.




                               C      O



50
Common, Convenient Features
                                                 Still Images          Movies

   Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, use
digital zoom for up to about 16x enlargement.

                                  Move the zoom lever toward i.
                                  Hold the lever until zooming stops.
                                  Zooming stops at the largest possible zoom
                                  factor (before the image becomes grainy),
                                  which is displayed when you release the
                                  zoom lever.
           Zoom Factor            Move the zoom lever toward i
                                  again.
                                  The camera zooms in even closer on the



                                      PY
                                  subject, using digital zoom.




                             C      O
     • Zoomed images may look grainy, under some resolution settings
       (p. 57) and zoom factors. In this case, the zoom factor is shown in
       blue.

     • Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm
       film equivalent).
       28 – 448 mm (28 – 112 mm with optical zoom alone)
     • To deactivate digital zoom, press the n button, choose [Digital Zoom] on
       the 4 tab, and then choose [Off].




                                                                                51
Common, Convenient Features


                                              Still Images         Movies

     Using the Self-Timer
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed
shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter
button.

                                Configure the setting.
                                Press the m button, choose      in the menu,
                                and then choose the ] option (p. 40).
                                Once the setting is complete, ] is displayed.




                                     O PY
                               C
                                Shoot.
                                For Still Images: Press the shutter button
                                halfway to focus on the subject, and then
                                press it all the way down.
                                For Movies: Press the movie button.
                                Once you start the self-timer, the lamp will
                                blink and the camera will play a self-timer
                                sound.
                                Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
                                and sound will speed up. (When the flash
                                fires, the lamp will remain lit.)
                                To cancel shooting after you have triggered
                                the self-timer, press the n button.
                                To restore the original setting, choose      in
                                step 1.




52
Common, Convenient Features


  Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have
pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing
the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.

                                    Configure the setting.
                                    Follow step 1 on p. 52 and choose [.
                                    Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed.
                                    Follow step 2 on p. 52 to shoot.



  Customizing the Self-Timer
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).




                                        PY
                                    Choose $.
                                    Follow step 1 on p. 52, choose $, and then


                                      O
                                    press the n button.



                               C    Configure the setting.
                                    Turn the z dial to choose [Delay], either
                                    press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose [Shots], and then press the m
                                    button.
                                    Once the setting is complete, $ is displayed.
                                    Follow step 2 on p. 52 to shoot.


     • For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
       before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.

     • When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are
       determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the flash
       fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop
       automatically when the memory card becomes full.
     • When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the
       shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires,
       the lamp will remain lit.)


                                                                                       53
Common, Convenient Features


                                                                        Still Images

     Adding the Shooting Date and Time
The camera can add the shooting date and time to images in the lower-right
corner. However, note that these cannot be removed. Confirm beforehand
that the date and time are correct (p. 18).

                                    Configure the setting.
                                    Press the n button, choose [Date
                                    Stamp] on the 4 tab, and then choose the
                                    desired option (p. 41).
                                    Once the setting is complete, [DATE] is
                                    displayed.




                                    Shoot.
                                          O PY
                                   CAs you take shots, the camera adds the
                                    shooting date or time to the lower-right corner
                                    of images.
                                    To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in
                                    step 1.

      • Images originally recorded without the date and time can be printed with this
        information as follows. However, adding the date and time to images that
        already have this information may cause it to be printed twice.
        - Use camera DPOF print settings (p. 208) to print
        - Use the included software to print
          For details, refer to the Software Guide.
        - Print using printer functions (p. 202)




54
Common, Convenient Features


                                                                       Still Images

   Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.

                                   Specify Tracking AF.
                                   Press the o button.
                                       is displayed in the center of the screen.


                                   Choose a subject to focus on.
                                   Aim the camera so that       is on the desired
                                   subject, and then press the shutter button
                                   halfway.
                                   A blue frame is displayed, and the camera will




                                       PY
                                   keep the subject in focus and image
                                   brightness adjusted (Servo AF).



                                     O
                                   Shoot.



                              C
                                   Press the shutter button all the way down to
                                   shoot.
                                   Press the o button to cancel Tracking AF.

     • Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly,
       or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely.




                                                                                      55
Image Customization Features
                                                                            Still Images

     Changing the Aspect Ratio
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.

                                      Configure the setting.
                                      Press the m button, choose         in the menu,
                                      and choose the desired option (p. 40).
                                      Once the setting is complete, the screen
                                      aspect ratio will be updated.
                                      To restore the original setting, repeat this
                                      process but choose       .




                                             PY
      Same aspect ratio as HDTVs, used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar




                                           O
      display devices.




                                      C
      Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard
      sizes.

      Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch
      or A-series sizes.

      Square aspect ratio.
      Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits.

      • At aspect ratios other than    , digital zoom (p. 51) is not available ([Digital
        Zoom] is set to [Off]).




56
Image Customization Features


                                                                Still Images

   Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on how
many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see
“Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.

                               Configure the setting.
                               Press the m button, choose         in the menu,
                               and choose the desired option (p. 40).
                               The option you configured is now displayed.
                               To restore the original setting, repeat this
                               process but choose       .




                                 O PY
  Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size
  (for 4:3 Images)
 A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)

 A3 – A5 (11.7 x
                          C         : For e-mailing images.


 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
 5 x 7 in.
 Postcard
 3.5 x 5 in.




                                                                               57
Image Customization Features


                                                                 Still Images

     Changing the Compression Ratio
     (Image Quality)
Choose from two compression ratios, as follows:       (Fine),  (Normal). For
guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory
card, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.

                                Configure the setting.
                                Press the m button, choose         in the menu,
                                press the n button, and choose the
                                desired option (p. 40).
                                The option you configured is now displayed.
                                To restore the original setting, repeat this
                                process but choose       .




                                     O PY
     Red-Eye Correction         C                                Still Images



Red-eye that occurs in the flash photography can be automatically corrected
as follows.

                                Access the [Built-in Flash
                                Settings] screen.
                                Press the n button, choose [Flash
                                Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m
                                button (p. 41).




58
Image Customization Features


                                  Configure the setting.
                                  Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then choose
                                  [On] (p. 41).
                                  Once the setting is complete, R is displayed.
                                  To restore the original setting, repeat this
                                  process but choose [Off].


     • Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes
       (if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for
       example).

     • You can also correct existing images (p. 164).
     • You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the
       r button and immediately pressing the n button.




                                       PY
                                                                      Still Images

   Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
   Mercury Lamps

                                     O
In shots of evening scenes with subjects illuminated by mercury lamps, the


                             C
subjects or background may appear to have a greenish tinge. This greenish
tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-area White
Balance.

                                  Configure the setting.
                                  Press the n button, choose [Hg Lamp
                                  Corr.] on the 4 tab, and then choose [On]
                                  (p. 41).
                                  Once the setting is complete,       is
                                  displayed.
                                  To restore the original setting, repeat this
                                  process but choose [Off].




                                                                                     59
Image Customization Features



      • After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set
        [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by
        mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.

      • Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.




                                                                            Movies

     Changing Movie Image Quality
3 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum movie
length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card, see
“Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.

                                     Configure the setting.



                                             PY
                                     Press the m button, choose         in the menu,
                                     and choose the desired option (p. 40).



                                           O
                                     The option you configured is now displayed.
                                     To restore the original setting, repeat this


                                   C process but choose       .




60
Image Customization Features


Image
              Resolution        Frame Rate                     Details
Quality

          1920 x 1080        24 fps            For shooting in Full HD

          1280 x 720         30 fps            For shooting in HD

          640 x 480          30 fps            For shooting in standard definition

      • In   and      modes, black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the
        screen indicate image areas not recorded.


                                                                         Movies

   Using the Wind Filter
Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced.
However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when




                                        PY
there is no wind.


                                  Configure the setting.



                             C        O
                                  Press the n button, choose [Wind Filter]
                                  on the 4 tab, and then choose [On] (p. 41).
                                  To restore the original setting, repeat this
                                  process but choose [Off].




                                                                                     61
Helpful Shooting Features
                                                                              Still Images

     Using the Electronic Level
An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a
guideline to determine if the camera is level.

                                      Display the electronic level.
                                      Press the p button several times to display
                                      the electronic level.




                                             O PY
                                      Level the camera as needed.


                                     C
                                      Level the camera so that the center of the
                                      electronic level is green.



      • If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the n button, and on
        the 4 tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a             to    or     to choose the
        electronic level.
      • Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you from using the
        electronic level, which will turn gray.
      • The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
      • If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be
        updated automatically to match the camera orientation.
      • If your shots are not level even if you use the electronic level, try calibrating the
        electronic level (p. 176).




62
Helpful Shooting Features


                                                                        Still Images

   Magnifying the Area in Focus
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway to enlarge the
image area in the AF frame.

                                   Configure the setting.
                                   Press the n button, choose [AF-Point
                                   Zoom] on the 4 tab, and then choose [On]
                                   (p. 41).




                                     O PY
                                   Check the focus.


                              C
                                   Press the shutter button halfway. The face
                                   detected as the main subject is now
                                   magnified.
                                   To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in
                                   step 1.


     • The display will not magnify if a face was not detected, or if the
       person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the
       screen.

     • The display will not magnify when using the digital zoom (p. 51) or Tracking AF
       (p. 55).




                                                                                       63
Helpful Shooting Features


                                                                       Still Images

     Checking for Closed Eyes
   is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their
eyes.

                                   Configure the setting.
                                   Press the n button, choose [Blink
                                   Detection] on the 4 tab, and then choose
                                   [On] (p. 41).

                                   Shoot.
                                   A frame, accompanied by         , is displayed
                                   when the camera detects a person whose
                                   eyes are closed.




                                           PY
                                   To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in
                                   step 1.




                                         O
      • When you have specified multiple shots in $ mode, this function is only




                                  C
        available for the final shot.




64
Still Images

    Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the 4 tab of the menu as follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “n Menu” (p. 41).

   Deactivating the AF Assist Beam
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when
you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.

                               Configure the setting.
                               Press the n button, choose [AF-assist
                               Beam] on the 4 tab, and then choose [Off]
                               (p. 41).
                               To restore the original setting, repeat this
                               process but choose [On].




                                   PY
   Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-


                                 O
eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.



                          C    Access the [Built-in Flash
                               Settings] screen.
                               Press the n button, choose [Flash
                               Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m
                               button (p. 41).

                               Configure the setting.
                               Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then choose
                               [Off] (p. 41).
                               To restore the original setting, repeat this
                               process but choose [On].




                                                                              65
Customizing Camera Operation



     Changing the Image Display Period After Shots
Change how long images are displayed after shots as follows.

                                Configure the setting.
                                Press the n button, choose [Review] on
                                the 4 tab, and then choose the desired
                                option (p. 41).
                                To restore the original setting, repeat this
                                process but choose [2 sec.].
                                2 – 10 sec. Displays images for the specified time.

                                           Displays images until you press the
                                Hold
                                           shutter button halfway.

                                Off        No image display after shots.




                                         PY
     Changing the Image Display Style After Shots


                                       O
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.



                             C  Configure the setting.
                                Press the n button, choose [Review
                                Info] on the 4 tab, and then choose the
                                desired option (p. 41).
                                To restore the original setting, repeat this
                                process but choose [Off].
                                Off           Displays only the image.
                                Detailed      Displays shooting details (p. 224).

                                              Shows the area in the AF frame
                                              magnified, enabling you to check the
                                Focus Check
                                              focus. Follow the steps in “Checking
                                              the Focus” (p. 139).




66
3
Other Shooting Modes
 Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take
 shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured


                         PY
 using special functions



                  C    O



                                                      67
Still Images        Movies

     Specific Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.

                             Enter K mode.
                             Set the mode dial to K.



                             Choose a shooting mode.
                             Press the m button, choose    in the menu,
                             and then choose a shooting mode (p. 40).

                             Shoot.




                                    PY
                                           Still Images        Movies

                          I Shoot portraits (Portrait)


                                  O
                             Take shots of people with a softening effect.



                            C              Still Images

                          JShoot landscapes (Landscape)
                                                               Movies



                             Shoot majestic landscapes with a real sense
                             of depth.


                                                             Still Images

                          VTake shots of kids and pets
                           (Kids&Pets)
                             Capture subjects that move around, such as
                             children and pets, without missing photo
                             opportunities.
                             For details on the shooting range, see
                             “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.

68
Specific Scenes


                                  Still Images

  Shoot moving subjects (Sports)
  Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the
  subject in focus.
  For details on the shooting range, see
  “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.
                                  Still Images

  Shoot evening scenes without
  using a tripod (Handheld
  NightScene)
  Beautiful shots of evening scenes, created by
  combining consecutive shots to reduce
  camera shake and image noise.




      PY
  When using a tripod, shoot in A mode
  (p. 44).



    O
                Still Images        Movies




C
wShoot at the beach (Beach)
  Take shots of brightly lit people on sandy
  beaches where the reflected sunlight is
  strong.

                Still Images        Movies
S Shoot under water (Underwater)
  Natural-colored shots of sea life and
  underwater scenery, when you use an
  optional waterproof case (p. 184).




                                                 69
Specific Scenes


                                                 Still Images         Movies

                              OTake shots of foliage (Foliage)
                                  Shoot trees and leaves, such as new growth,
                                  autumn leaves or blossoms, in vivid colors.


                                                 Still Images         Movies

                              P Shoot with snowy backgrounds
                                (Snow)
                                  Bright, natural-colored shots of people
                                  against snowy backgrounds.

                                                 Still Images         Movies

                              t Shoot fireworks (Fireworks)



                                          PY
                                  Vivid shots of fireworks.




                                C       O
     • Because the camera will shoot continuously in
       steady while shooting.
                                                            mode, hold it

     • In     mode, shooting conditions that cause excessive camera shake
       or similar issues may prevent the camera from combining images,
       and you may not be able to obtain the expected results.
     • In t mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to
       keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case, set [IS Mode] to
       [Off] (p. 120).

     • In V,      ,    , and S modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
       (p. 95) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.




70
Still Images       Movies

    Image Effects (Creative Filters)
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.

                               Enter       mode.
                               Set the mode dial to          .



                               Choose a shooting mode.
                               Press the m button, choose    in the menu,
                               and then choose a shooting mode (p. 40).

                               Shoot.




                                   PY
     • In      ,   ,   ,    ,   , and     modes, try taking some test shots
       first, to make sure you obtain the desired results.




                          C      O            Still Images       Movies

                                Shoot in vivid colors (Super Vivid)
                               Shots in rich, vivid colors.




                                              Still Images       Movies

                                Posterized shots (Poster Effect)
                               Shots that resemble an old poster or
                               illustration.




                                                                          71
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                                                       Still Images

     Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic
     Range)
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels each
time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out
highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast
shots.

                                    Choose          .
                                    Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose              .
                                    Hold the camera still.
                                    Mount the camera on a tripod or take other




                                           PY
                                    measures to keep it still and prevent camera
                                    shake.

                                    Shoot.



                                    C    O
                                    When you press the shutter button all the way
                                    down, the camera will take three shots and
                                    combine them.

      • Set the [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120) in this mode.


      • Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
      • There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes and
        combines the images.




72
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


  Adding Color Effects
                                   Choose a color effect.
                                   Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose       .
                                   Press the      button, choose a color effect
                                   (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7
                                   dial), and then press the    button again.


     Effect Off           —

     Sepia                Sepia tone shots.
     B/W                  Black and white shots.

     Super Vivid          Shots in rich, vivid colors.

     Poster Effect        Shots that resemble an old poster or illustration.




                                        PY
                                                     Still Images            Movies

   Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)


                              C       O
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs. Choose from five effect levels.

                                   Choose            .
                                   Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose                 .
                                   Choose an effect level.
                                   Turn the z dial to choose an effect level.

                                   Shoot.



     • Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not
       shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (p. 136).
     • The image aging effect is not applied to movies.




                                                                                       73
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                                                    Still Images

     Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-eye
     Effect)
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.

                                    Choose        .
                                    Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose         .
                                    Choose an effect level.
                                    Turn the z dial to choose an effect level.
                                    A preview is shown of how your shot will look
                                    with the effect applied.

                                    Shoot.




                                           PY
                                                  Still Images        Movies

     Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature
     Effect)

                                    C    O
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and
below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects
in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded.

                                    Choose        .
                                    Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose         .
                                    A white frame is displayed, indicating the
                                    image area that will not be blurred.
                                    Choose the area to keep in focus.
                                    Press the     button.
                                    Move the zoom lever to resize the frame, and
                                    turn the 7 dial to move it.




74
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                For movies, choose the movie
                                playback speed.
                                Turn the z dial to choose the speed.

                                Return to the shooting screen and
                                shoot.
                                Press the     button to return to the shooting
                                screen, and then shoot.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-
Minute Clips)
              Speed                                    Playback Time

                                                       Approx. 12 sec.

                                                        Approx. 6 sec.




                                    PY
                                                        Approx. 3 sec.




                                  O
 • The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the



                           C
   zoom before shooting.

 • To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the qr buttons in step
   2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the op buttons.
 • To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation press the op buttons,
   and to move the frame when it is in vertical orientation, press the qr buttons.
 • Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame.
 • Movie image quality is      at an aspect ratio of    and     at an aspect ratio of
       (p. 56). These quality settings cannot be changed.




                                                                                   75
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                                                   Still Images

     Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy
     Camera Effect)
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.

                                    Choose        .
                                    Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose        .
                                    Choose a color tone.
                                    Turn the z dial to choose a color tone.
                                    A preview is shown of how your shot will look
                                    with the effect applied.

                                    Shoot.

Standard

Warm

                                         O PY
           Shots resemble toy camera images.

           Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].

Cool

                                    C
           Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].




76
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                                Still Images          Movies

   Shooting in Monochrome
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.

                                   Choose        .
                                   Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose        .
                                   Choose a color tone.
                                   Turn the z dial to choose a color tone.
                                   A preview is shown of how your shot will look
                                   with the effect applied.

                                   Shoot.

B/W       Black and white shots.




                                      PY
Sepia     Sepia tone shots.




                                    O
Blue      Blue and white shots.




                              C



                                                                                77
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                                  Still Images          Movies

     Shooting with Color Accent
Choose a single image color to keep and change other colors to black and
white.

                                    Choose T.
                                    Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose T.

                                    Access the setting screen.
                                    Press the      button.
                                    The original image and the Color Accent
                                    image are displayed one after another.
                                    By default, green is the color that will be kept.
                                    Specify the color.



                                           PY
                                    Position the center frame over the color to
                                    keep, and then press the q button.



                                         O
                                    The specified color is recorded.



                                    C
                                    Specify the range of colors to keep.
                                    Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
       Recorded Color
                                    adjust the range.
                                    To keep only your specified color, choose a
                                    large negative value. To keep colors similar
                                    to your specified color as well, choose a large
                                    positive value.
                                    Press the      button to return to the shooting
                                    screen.

      • Using the flash in this mode may cause unexpected results.
      • In some shooting scenes, images may look grainy and colors may
        not look as expected.




78
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                             Still Images         Movies

   Shooting with Color Swap
You can replace one image color with another before shooting. Note that only
one color can be replaced.

                               Choose Y.
                               Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose Y.




                               Access the setting screen.
                               Press the      button.




                                   PY
                               The original image and the Color Swap image
                               are displayed one after another.
                               By default, green will be replaced with gray.




                          C      O
                               Specify the color to replace.
                               Position the center frame over the color to
                               replace, and then press the q button.
                               The specified color is recorded.



                               Specify the new color.
                               Position the center frame over the new color,
                               and then press the r button.
                               The specified color is recorded.

                               Specify the range of colors to
                               replace.
                               Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               adjust the range.


                                                                            79
Image Effects (Creative Filters)


                                   To replace only your specified color, choose
                                   a large negative value. To replace colors
                                   similar to your specified color as well, choose
                                   a large positive value.
                                   Press the      button to return to the shooting
                                   screen.

     • Using the flash in this mode may cause unexpected results.
     • In some shooting scenes, images may look grainy and colors may
       not look as expected.




                                        O PY
                                   C



80
Special Modes for Other Purposes
                                                    Still Images          Movies

   Auto Clip Recording (Movie Digest)
You can make a short movie of a day just by shooting still images.
Before each shot, the camera will automatically record a movie clip of the
scene. Each clip recorded that day is combined into a single file.

                                   Choose           .
                                   Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose                 .

                                   Shoot.
                                   To shoot a still image, press the shutter
                                   button all the way down.
                                   Before shooting, the camera will
                                   automatically record a clip about 2 – 4
                                   seconds long.




                                        PY
     • Clips may not be recorded if you shoot a still image immediately after



                                      O
       turning the camera on, choosing         mode, or operating the camera
       in other ways.


                              C
     • Battery life is shorter in this mode than in A mode, because clips
       are recorded for each shot.
     • Any sounds from camera operations during movie recording will be
       included in the movie.

     •       mode movie quality is      and cannot be changed.
     • Clips are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if they were
       recorded on the same day in         mode.
       - If the movie file size reaches about 4 GB or the total recording time reaches
         approx. 1 hour
       - If a movie is protected (p. 148)
       - If a movie has been edited (p. 165)
       - When the daylight saving time (p. 19) or time zone settings have been
         changed (p. 175)
       - If a new folder is created (p. 173)
       - If the copyright information is changed or deleted (p. 177)
     • Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press the
       shutter button halfway, use camera controls, or trigger the self-timer (p. 169).
     • Movies created in        mode can be viewed by date (p. 143).




                                                                                     81
Special Modes for Other Purposes


                                                                     Still Images

     Auto Shooting After Face Detection (Smart
     Shutter)
  Auto Shooting After Smile Detection
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.

                                  Choose          .
                                  Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose     ,
                                  and then press the     button.
                                  Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose     , and then press the    button.
                                  The camera now enters shooting standby




                                          PY
                                  mode, and [Smile Detection on] is displayed.
                                  Aim the camera at a person.


                                        O
                                  Each time the camera detects a smile, it will
                                  shoot after the lamp lights up.


                                 CTo pause smile detection, press the p
                                  button. Press the p button again to resume
                                  detection.


      • Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will
        continue shooting each time a smile is detected.

      • You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
      • The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and
        open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible.
      • To change the number of shots, press the op buttons after choosing      in
        step 1. [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot.




82
Special Modes for Other Purposes


  Using the Wink Self-Timer
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down.
The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.

                                   Choose           .
                                   Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose     ,
                                   and then press the     button.
                                   Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   choose     , and then press the    button.
                                   Compose the shot and press the
                                   shutter button halfway.
                                   Make sure a green frame is displayed around
                                   the face of the person who will wink.




                                       PY
                                   Press the shutter button all the way
                                   down.
                                   The camera now enters shooting standby




                              C      O
                                   mode, and [Wink to take picture] is displayed.
                                   The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is
                                   played.
                                   Face the camera and wink.
                                   The camera will shoot about two seconds
                                   after detecting a wink by the person whose
                                   face is inside the frame.
                                   To cancel shooting after you have triggered
                                   the self-timer, press the n button.

     • If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
     • Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses.
     • Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.
     • If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
     • To change the number of shots, press the op buttons after choosing           in
       step 1. [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot.
     • If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way
       down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks.




                                                                                    83
Special Modes for Other Purposes


  Using the Face Self-Timer
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(p. 108). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar shots.

                                    Choose           .
                                    Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose     ,
                                    and then press the     button.
                                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose     , and then press the    button.

                                    Compose the shot and press the
                                    shutter button halfway.
                                    Make sure a green frame is displayed around
                                    the face you focus on and white frames




                                            PY
                                    around other faces.
                                    Press the shutter button all the way



                                   C
                                    down.

                                          O
                                    The camera now enters shooting standby
                                    mode, and [Look straight at camera to start
                                    count down] is displayed.
                                    The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is
                                    played.
                                    Join the subjects in the shooting
                                    area and look at the camera.
                                    After the camera detects a new face, the
                                    lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
                                    up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain
                                    lit.) About two seconds later, the camera will
                                    shoot.
                                    To cancel shooting after you have triggered
                                    the self-timer, press the n button.
     • Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area,
       the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
     • To change the number of shots, press the op buttons after choosing            in
       step 1. [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot.

84
Special Modes for Other Purposes


                                                                    Still Images

   High-Speed Continuous Shooting (High-speed
   Burst HQ)
You can shoot a series of shots in rapid succession by holding the shutter button
all the way down. For details on continuous shooting speed, and maximum
number of continuous shots, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (see
“Specifications” in the Getting Started guide).
HQ: High Quality

                                  Choose         .
                                  Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose             .
                                  Shoot.
                                  Hold the shutter button all the way down to
                                  shoot continuously.




                                      PY
                                  Shooting stops when you release the shutter
                                  button or reach the maximum number of



                                    O
                                  shots, after which [Busy] is displayed and the
                                  shots are shown in the order you took them.


                            C
     • Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot.
     • The screen is blank while you are shooting.
     • There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can shoot again.
       Additionally, depending on the memory card, there may be a delay before you
       can shoot again. Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended.
     • Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings,
       and the zoom position.

  Images Displayed During Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group, and only
the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that the image is
part of a group,         is displayed in the upper left of the screen.

     • If you erase a grouped image (p. 152), all images in the group are
       also erased. Be careful when erasing images.




                                                                                   85
Special Modes for Other Purposes


     • Grouped images can be played back individually (p. 144) and ungrouped
       (p. 144).
     • Protecting (p. 148) a grouped image will protect all images in the group.
     • Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Filtered
       Playback (p. 141) or Smart Shuffle (p. 147). In this case, images are temporarily
       ungrouped.
     • Grouped images cannot be tagged as favorites (p. 157), edited (pp. 155 – 164),
       categorized (p. 158), or printed (p. 202), assigned as a start-up image (p. 170),
       and you cannot specify the number of copies to print (p. 210). To do these
       things, either view grouped images individually (p. 144) or cancel grouping
       (p. 144) first.




                                          O PY
                                  C



86
Special Modes for Other Purposes


                                                                       Still Images

   Shooting Stitch Assist Images
Shoot a large subject by taking multiple shots at various positions, and then
use the included software to combine them into a panorama.

                                   Choose x or v.
                                   Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose x or
                                   v.
                                   Take the first shot.
                                   The first shot will determine the exposure and
                                   white balance.




                                       PY
                                   Take additional shots.


                                     O
                                   Compose the second shot so that it partially



                              C
                                   overlaps the image area of first shot.
                                   Minor misalignment of overlapping portions
                                   will be corrected automatically when the
                                   images are combined.
                                   Take up to 26 shots, the same way you took
                                   the second shot.

                                   Finish shooting.
                                   Press the m button.
                                   Use the software to combine the
                                   images.
                                   For instructions on merging images, refer to
                                   the Software Guide.

     • This function is not available when using a TV as a display while shooting
       (p. 187).
     • To use AF lock, assign % to the        button (p. 131).



                                                                                      87
Movies

     Shooting Various Movies

     Shooting Movies in E Mode
                                Enter E mode.
                                Set the mode dial to E.

                                Configure the settings to suit the
                                movie (pp. 226 – 234).
                                Shoot.
                                Press the movie button.
                                To stop movie recording, press the movie
                                button again.
  Locking or Changing Image Brightness Before Shooting
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop increments




                                       PY
within a range of –2 to +2.




                                     O
                                Lock the exposure.



                               C
                                Press the     button to lock the exposure.
                                The exposure shift bar is displayed.
                                To unlock the exposure, press the     button
                                again.

                                Adjust the exposure.
                                Turn the 7 dial to adjust the exposure, as you
                                watch the screen.

                                Shoot.




88
Shooting Various Movies



   Shooting iFrame Movies
Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or devices.
You can quickly edit, save, and manage iFrame movies using the included
software.

                                  Choose          .
                                  Set the mode dial to E.
                                  Press the m button, choose E in the menu,
                                  and then choose       (p. 40).
                                  Black bars displayed on the top and bottom
                                  edges of the screen indicate image areas not
                                  recorded.

                                  Shoot.




                                      PY
     • The resolution is    (p. 60) and cannot be changed.
     • iFrame is a video format developed by Apple.




                             C      O



                                                                             89
O PY
     C



90
4
G mode
   More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style




                                  O PY
                           C
• Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to G
  mode.
• G: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
• Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than G,
  make sure the function is available in that mode (pp. 226 – 233).




                                                                          91
Still Images          Movies

     Shooting in Program AE Mode (G Mode)
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.

                                   Enter G mode.
                                   Set the mode dial to G.

                                   Customize the settings as desired
                                   (pp. 93 – 120), and then shoot.


     • If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button
       halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. To obtain
       adequate exposure, try adjusting the following settings.
       - Activate the flash (p. 116)
       - Choose a higher ISO speed (p. 95)
     • Movies can be recorded in G mode as well, by pressing the movie button.




                                            PY
       However, some H and n settings may be automatically adjusted for
       movie recording.
     • For details on the shooting range in G mode, see “Specifications” in the Getting



                                          O
       Started guide.




                                  C



92
Still Images

    Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)

   Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
   Compensation)
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –3 to +3.

                                   As you watch the screen, turn the exposure
                                   compensation dial to adjust brightness.
                                   The correction level you specified is now
                                   displayed.




                                     O PY
                             C
   Locking Image Brightness/Exposure (AE Lock)
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.

                                   Lock the exposure.
                                   Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with
                                   the exposure locked, and then press the
                                   button.
                                       is displayed, and the exposure is locked.

                                   Compose the shot and shoot.
                                   After one shot, AE is unlocked and            is no
                                   longer displayed.
     • AE: Auto Exposure
     • After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed
       and aperture value by turning the 7 dial (Program Shift).



                                                                                      93
Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)



     Changing the Metering Method
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.

                                    Press the     button, turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose the desired option, and then press
                                    the     button again.
                                    The option you configured is now displayed.




                     For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots.
      Evaluative
                     Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions.

                    Determines the average brightness of light across the entire image
      Center




                                            PY
                    area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more
      Weighted Avg.
                    important.
                     Metering restricted to within the   (Spot AE Point frame). You



                                          O
      Spot
                     can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame.




                                  C
  Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
                                    Set the metering method to
                                    Follow the step above to choose           .
                                                                                  .


                                    Configure the setting.
                                    Press the n button, choose [Spot AE
                                    Point] on the 4 tab, and then choose [AF
                                    Point] (p. 41).
                                    The Spot AE Point frame will now be linked to
                                    the movement of the AF frame (p. 110).

      • Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (p. 108) or
        [Tracking AF] (p. 111).




94
Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)



   Changing the ISO Speed
                                  Press the o button, choose an option (either
                                  press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and
                                  then press the m button.
                                  The option you configured is now displayed.




                                    Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
                                    shooting mode and conditions.

                                           For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
                                     Low For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at
                                         twilight.




                                      PY
                                     High For shooting night scenes, or in dark
                                          rooms.




                                    O
    • To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to      , press
      the shutter button halfway.



                             C
    • Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may
      be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions.
    • Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce
      subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look grainy.
    • Press the      button while in the setting screen to set  .

  Adjusting the Maximum                   ISO Speed
Maximum ISO speed when the camera is set to                can be specified in a
range of  –    .

                                  Access the setting screen.
                                  Press the n button, choose [ISO Auto
                                  Settings] on the 4 tab, and then press the
                                  m button (p. 41).




                                                                                    95
Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)


                                   Configure the setting.
                                   Choose [Max ISO Speed], and then choose
                                   the desired option (p. 41).




  Adjusting           Sensitivity
Choose from three levels of sensitivity for        .

                                   Follow step 1 in “Adjusting the Maximum
                                   ISO Speed” (p. 95) to access the setting
                                   screen.
                                   Choose [Rate of Change], and then choose
                                   the desired option (p. 41).




                                         O PY
      • If you press the n button while in the ISO auto settings screen (p. 95), the
        [ISO Auto Settings] screen will appear.



                                  C
     Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO
     NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.

                                   Choose a noise reduction level.
                                   Press the n button, choose [High ISO
                                   NR] in the 4 tab, and then choose the
                                   desired option.




96
Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)



   Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Mode)
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels (standard
exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time you shoot. You
can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure (relative to
standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

                                   Choose           .
                                   Press the m button, choose             in the menu,
                                   and then choose     (p. 40).




                                   Configure the setting.




                                        PY
                                   Press the n button, and then adjust the
                                   setting by pressing the qr buttons or turning
                                   the 7 dial.




                              C       O
     • AEB is only available in ! mode (pp. 22, 45).
     • Continuous shooting (p. 104) is not available in this mode.

     • If exposure compensation is already in use (p. 93), the value specified for that
       function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function.
     • You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the n button
       when the exposure compensation screen (p. 93) is displayed.
     • Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in $ (p. 53).
     • [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot.




                                                                                     97
Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)



     Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness.
To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To
preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct.

      • Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
        may cause images to appear grainy.

      • You can also correct existing images (p. 163).
      • You can customize camera operation so that turning the z or 7 dial adjusts
        DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings (p. 129).

  Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Choose from three correction methods.




                                          PY
                                  Press the m button, choose      in the menu,



                                        O
                                  and choose the desired option (p. 40).
                                  Once the setting is complete, @ is displayed.


                                 C
      • With      and     , the ISO speed will be restored to     if you attempt
        to set a speed higher than      .
      • With     , the ISO speed will be restored to     if you attempt to set a
        speed lower than        .
      • With     , the ISO speed will be restored to     if you attempt to set a
        speed lower than        .




98
Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)


  Shadow Correct
                                Press the m button, choose      in the menu,
                                press the n button, and choose
                                (p. 40).
                                Once the setting is complete, @ is displayed.




   Using the ND Filter
To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the ND
filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to 3
stops).

                                Press the m button, choose        in the menu,




                                    PY
                                and then choose     (p. 40).




                           C      O
     • Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still
       and prevent camera shake. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]
       (p. 120).




                                                                            99
Color and Continuous Shooting
                                                      Still Images          Movies

   Adjusting White Balance
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.

                                   Press the m button, choose     in the menu,
                                   and choose the desired option (p. 40).
                                   The option you configured is now displayed.




                       Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting
       Auto
                       conditions.




                                            PY
       Day Light       For shooting outdoors in fair weather.

       Cloudy          For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight.




                                          O
                       For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting
       Tungsten
                       and similarly colored fluorescent lighting.

       Fluorescent


       Fluorescent H
                                  C
                       For shooting under warm-white, cool-white, and similarly colored
                       fluorescent lighting.

                       For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored
                       fluorescent lighting.

  h    Flash           For shooting with the flash.

                       Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones
  S    Underwater
                       down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall.

       Custom          For manually setting a custom white balance (p. 101).




100
Color and Continuous Shooting


  Custom White Balance
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white balance
under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.

                                Follow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance”
                                (p. 100) to choose       or    .
                                Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so
                                that the entire screen is white. Press the
                                button.
                                The tint of the screen changes once the white
                                balance data has been recorded.

     • Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
       recording white balance data.




                                    PY
  Manually Correcting White Balance
You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the

color-compensating filter.


                            C     O
effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or


                                Configure the setting.
                                Follow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance”
                                (p. 100) to choose the white balance option.
                                Turn the z dial to adjust the correction level
                                for B and A.


                                Configure advanced settings.
                                To configure more advanced settings, press
                                the n button and turn the z or 7 dial
                                to adjust the correction level.
                                To reset the correction level, press the
                                button.
                                Press the n button to complete the
                                setting.


                                                                          101
Color and Continuous Shooting



      • The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you
        switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction levels
        will be reset if you record custom white balance data.

      • B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
      • One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color
        temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color
        temperature conversion filter density)
      • You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen
        can be accessed simply by turning the z dial (p. 129).


                                                     Still Images          Movies

   Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia or
black and white.




                                             PY
                                    Press the m button, choose     in the menu,
                                    and choose the desired option (p. 40).



                                           O
                                    The option you configured is now displayed.




      My Colors Off
                                   C                      —

                             Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images
      Vivid
                             sharper.

                             Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued
      Neutral
                             images.
      Sepia                  Creates sepia tone images.

      B/W                    Creates black and white images.

                             Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid
      Positive Film          Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors
                             resembling images on positive film.

      Lighter Skin Tone      Lightens skin tones.

      Darker Skin Tone       Darkens skin tones.


102
Color and Continuous Shooting


                         Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and
     Vivid Blue
                         other blue subjects more vivid.
                         Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage,
     Vivid Green
                         and other green subjects more vivid.
                         Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more
     Vivid Red
                         vivid.
                         Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other
     Custom Color
                         qualities as desired (see below).


     • White balance (p. 100) cannot be set in    or     modes.
     • With    and     modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may be
       modified. These settings may not produce the expected results with
       some skin tones.

  Custom Color



                                    PY
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red,
green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.




                           C      O
                                Access the setting screen.
                                Follow the steps in “Changing Image Color
                                Tones (My Colors)” (p. 102) to choose
                                and then press the n button.
                                                                        ,


                                Configure the setting.
                                Press the op buttons to choose an option,
                                and then specify the value by pressing the
                                qr buttons or turning the 7 dial.
                                For stronger/more intense effects (or darker
                                skin tones), adjust the value to the right, and
                                for weaker/lighter effects (or lighter skin
                                tones), adjust the value to the left.
                                Press the n button to complete the
                                setting.




                                                                               103
Color and Continuous Shooting


                                                                        Still Images

   Continuous Shooting
Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.

                                    Configure the setting.
                                    Press the m button, choose     in the menu,
                                    and choose the desired option (p. 40).
                                    The option you configured is now displayed.

                                    Shoot.
                                    Hold the shutter button all the way down to
                                    shoot continuously.
       Mode                                     Description




                                            PY
                      Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined
 W Continuous
                      when you press the shutter button halfway.

      Continuous      Continuous shooting and focusing.



                                          O
      Shooting AF     [AF Frame] is set to [Center] and cannot be changed.




                                   C
                      Continuous shooting, with the focus fixed at the position
      Continuous
                      determined in manual focusing. In t mode, focus is determined
      Shooting LV*
                      by the first shot.

* In t mode (p. 70), AF lock (p. 114), or manual focus mode (p. 106),     is changed to
     .
* For details on the continuous shooting speed in each mode, see “Specifications” in the
  Getting Started guide.

      • Cannot be used with the self-timer (p. 52) or [Blink Detection] (p. 64).
      • Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
        down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
        zoom position.
      • As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
      • Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.




104
Shooting Range and Focusing
                                                  Still Images          Movies

   Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 100
mm or 112 mm (35mm film equivalents). This is convenient when you want
to shoot at the angle of view of those focal lengths.

                                  Assign            to the z dial (p. 128).

                                  Choose a focal length.
                                  Turn the z dial clockwise until it clicks to
                                  change the focal length from 28 mm to 35
                                  mm. Keep turning the z dial to increase the
                                  focal length, which changes to 50 mm, 85
                                  mm, 100 mm, and 112 mm at each click.




                                      PY
     • Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn the
       z dial.




                             C      O
     • When using the digital zoom (p. 51), turning the z dial clockwise will not
       change the zoom factor. However, turning the z dial counterclockwise will set
       the focal length to 112 mm.


                                                                      Still Images

   Shooting Close-ups (Macro)
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to e. For
details on the focusing range, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started
guide.

                                  Press the q button, choose e (either press
                                  the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then
                                  press the m button.
                                  Once the setting is complete, e is displayed.




                                                                                 105
Shooting Range and Focusing



      • If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
      • Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
      • In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, e will turn gray
        and the camera will not focus.

      • To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting
        with the camera set to [ (p. 53).


                                                  Still Images         Movies

   Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway
to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position you
specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Specifications” in the




                                          PY
Getting Started guide.

                                  Choose          .



                                 C      O
                                  Press the q button, choose      (either press
                                  the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then
                                  press the m button.
                                      and the MF indicator are displayed.


                                  Specify the general focal position.
                                  Referring to the on-screen MF indicator bar
                                  (which shows the distance and focal position)
                                  and the magnified display area, turn the 7
                                  dial to specify the general focal position.

                                  Fine-tune the focus.
                                  Press the shutter button halfway to have the
                MF Indicator
                                  camera fine-tune the focal position (Safety
                                  MF).
                                  You can also fine-tune the focus by pressing
                                  the     button.


106
Shooting Range and Focusing



     • AF frame mode or size cannot be changed while focusing manually
       (p. 108). If you want to change the AF frame mode or size, cancel
       manual focus mode first.
     • Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (p. 51) or digital
       tele-converter, or when using a TV as a display (p. 187), but the
       magnified display will not appear.

     • To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it.
     • To hide the magnified display area, press the n button and set [MF-Point
       Zoom] on the 4 tab to [Off] (p. 41).
     • To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed
       halfway, press the n button and set [Safety MF] on the 4 tab to [Off]
       (p. 41).


                                                   Still Images           Movies

   Digital Tele-Converter



                                       PY
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 1.9x.
This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it



                                     O
would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom
factor.


                              C    Press the n button, choose [Digital
                                   Zoom] on the 4 tab, and then choose the
                                   desired option (p. 41).
                                   The view is enlarged and the zoom factor is
                                   displayed on the screen.




     • Images will look grainy at a resolution (p. 57) of    or   . In this
       case, the zoom factor is shown in blue.
     • The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom (p. 51)
       and AF-point zoom (p. 63).
     • The digital tele-converter is only available when the aspect ratio is
          .




                                                                                   107
Shooting Range and Focusing


      • The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [1.9x] are 42.0 – 168 mm
        and 53.2 – 213 mm (35mm film equivalent).
      • The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the way
        toward i for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge the subject
        to the same size following step 2 on p. 51.


                                                  Still Images          Movies

   Changing the AF Frame Mode
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.

                                   Press the n button, choose [AF Frame]
                                   on the 4 tab, and then choose the desired
                                   option (p. 41).




                                         O PY     Still Images          Movies




                                  C
  Face AiAF
• Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
  metering only), and white balance (     only).
• After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around
  the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and up
  to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.
• When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects,
  within a certain range.
• After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
  displayed around faces in focus.




108
Shooting Range and Focusing



     • If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
       (without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the
       areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
     • If faces are not detected when Servo AF (p. 112) is set to [On], the
       AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the
       shutter button halfway.
     • Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
       - Subjects that are distant or extremely close
       - Subjects that are dark or light
       - Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
     • The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
     • No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
       press the shutter button halfway.

                                                               Still Images




                                   PY
  FlexiZone/Center
One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing.
With [FlexiZone], you can move and resize the AF frame (p. 110).




                           C     O
     • A yellow AF frame is displayed with    if the camera cannot focus
       when you press the shutter button halfway. Note that AF-point
       zooming (p. 63) is not possible.

                                                               Still Images
  Recomposing Shots While the Focus is Locked
As long as you keep the shutter button pressed halfway, the focus and
exposure are locked. You can recompose shots as needed before shooting.
This feature is called Focus Lock.

                               Focus.
                               Aim the camera so that the subject is
                               centered, and then press the shutter button
                               halfway.
                               Confirm that the AF frame displayed around
                               the subject is green.




                                                                          109
Shooting Range and Focusing


                                    Recompose the shot.
                                    Keeping the shutter button pressed halfway,
                                    move the camera to recompose the shot.

                                    Shoot.
                                    Press the shutter button all the way down.

                                                                        Still Images
  Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone)
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
frame mode to [FlexiZone] (p. 109).

                                    Prepare to move the AF frame.
                                    Press the       button. The AF frame turns
                                    orange.




                                            PY
                                    Move and resize the AF frame.
                                    Turn the 7 dial to move the AF frame, or




                                  C       O
                                    press the opqr buttons to move it by a
                                    smaller amount.
                                    To return the AF frame to the original position
                                    in the center, keep the     button held down.
                                    To reduce the AF frame size, press the
                                    n button. Press it again to restore it to
                                    the original size.

                                    Complete the settings.
                                    Press the       button.

      • AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
        zoom (p. 51) or digital tele-converter (p. 107), and in manual focus
        mode (p. 106).

      • You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (p. 94).




110
Shooting Range and Focusing


                                                                Still Images
  Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.

                               Choose [Tracking AF].
                               Follow the steps in “Changing the AF Frame
                               Mode” (p. 108) to choose [Tracking AF].
                                   is displayed in the center of the screen.
                               Choose a subject to focus on.
                               Aim the camera so that      is on the desired
                               subject, and then press the      button.




                                   PY
                               When the subject is detected, the camera
                               beeps and        is displayed. Even if the


                                 O
                               subject moves, the camera will continue to



                           C
                               track the subject within a certain range.
                               If no subject is detected,      is displayed.
                               To cancel tracking, press the         button
                               again.

                               Shoot.
                               Press the shutter button halfway.
                               changes to a blue     , which follows the
                               subject as the camera continues to adjust the
                               focus and exposure (Servo AF) (p. 112).
                               Press the shutter button all the way down to
                               shoot.
                               Even after your shot,    is still displayed and
                               the camera continues to track the subject.




                                                                           111
Shooting Range and Focusing



      • [Servo AF] is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
      • Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move
        too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the
        background too closely.
      • [AF-Point Zoom] on the 4 tab is not available.
      • e is not available.

      • The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway
        without pressing the   button. After your shot,    is displayed in the center
        of the screen.


                                                                       Still Images

   Shooting with Servo AF
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as




                                            PY
you press the shutter button halfway.




                                          O
                                    Configure the setting.



                                  C
                                    Press the n button, choose [Servo AF]
                                    on the 4 tab, and then choose [On]. (p. 41).

                                    Focus.
                                    The focus and exposure are maintained
                                    where the blue AF frame is displayed while
                                    you are pressing the shutter button halfway.

      • Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
      • In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
        may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this
        case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF
        frame mode.
      • If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
        aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button,
        and then press it halfway again.
      • AF lock shooting is not available.
      • [AF-Point Zoom] on the 4 tab is not available.
      • Not available when using the self-timer (p. 52).

112
Shooting Range and Focusing


                                                                   Still Images

   Changing the Focus Setting
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects
it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can
limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway.

                               Press the n button, choose [Continuous
                               AF] on the 4 tab, and then choose [Off]
                               (p. 41).
                                      Helps avoid missing sudden photo
                                      opportunities, because the camera
                               On
                                      constantly focuses on subjects until you
                                      press the shutter button halfway.

                                      Conserves battery power, because the
                               Off




                                   PY
                                      camera does not focus constantly.


                                                                   Still Images




                           C     O
   Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.

                               Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF]
                               (p. 108).
                               Enter Face Select mode.
                               Aim the camera at the person’s face and
                               press the        button.
                               After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a face
                               frame       is displayed around the face
                               detected as the main subject.
                               Even if the subject moves, the face frame
                               follows the subject within a certain range.
                               If a face is not detected,    is not displayed.




                                                                              113
Shooting Range and Focusing


                                Choose the face to focus on.
                                To switch the face frame      to another
                                detected face, press the     button.
                                After you have switched the face frame to all
                                detected faces, [Face Select : Off] is
                                displayed, and the specified AF frame mode
                                screen is displayed again.
                                Shoot.
                                Press the shutter button halfway. After the
                                camera focuses,       changes to      .
                                Press the shutter button all the way down to
                                shoot.




                                        PY
                                              Still Images        Movies

   Shooting with the AF Lock



                               C      O
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not
change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.

                                Lock the focus.
                                With the shutter button pressed halfway,
                                press the q button.
                                The focus is now locked, and      and the MF
                                indicator are displayed.
                                To unlock the focus, after you release the
                                shutter button, press the q button again and
                                choose       (either press the qr buttons or
                                turn the 7 dial).

                                Compose the shot and shoot.




114
Shooting Range and Focusing


                                                                       Still Images

   Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the first
one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther and
nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.

                                   Choose          .
                                   Press the m button, choose            in the menu,
                                   and then choose     (p. 40).




                                   Configure the setting.



                                       PY
                                   Press the n button, and then adjust the
                                   setting by pressing the qr buttons or turning


                                     O
                                   the 7 dial.



                              C
     • Focus bracketing is only available in ! mode (pp. 22, 45).
     • Continuous shooting (p. 104) is not available in this mode.

     • You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by choosing      in step 1 on
       p. 106 and immediately pressing the n button.
     • Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in $ (p. 53).
     • [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot.




                                                                                  115
Still Images

    Flash

   Activating Flash
You can have the flash fire for each shot. For details on the flash range, see
“Flash Range” (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide).

                                 Raise the flash.
                                 Move the        switch.

                                 Configure the setting.
                                 Press the r button, choose h (either press
                                 the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then
                                 press the m button.
                                 Once the setting is complete, h is displayed.

      • If the flash is lowered, the setting screen will not appear even if you




                                         PY
        press the r button. Move the          switch to raise the flash, then
        configure the setting.


   Shooting with Slow Synchro

                                C      O
With this option, the flash fires to increase the brightness of the main subject
(such as people) while the camera shoots at a slow shutter speed to increase
the brightness of the background that is out of the flash range.
For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (see “Specifications” in the
Getting Started guide).

                                 Raise the flash.
                                 Move the        switch.

                                 Configure the setting.
                                 Press the r button, choose Z (either press
                                 the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then
                                 press the m button.
                                 Once the setting is complete, Z is displayed.




116
Flash


                                  Shoot.
                                  Even after the flash fires, ensure that the
                                  main subject does not move until the shutter
                                  sound is finished playing.

     • Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still
       and prevent camera shake. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]
       (p. 120).
     • If the flash is lowered, the setting screen will not appear even if you
       press the r button. Move the          switch to raise the flash, then
       configure the setting.


   Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Just as with regular exposure compensation (p. 93), you can adjust the flash
exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.




                                      PY
                                  Raise the flash, press the r button and



                                    O
                                  immediately turn the z dial to choose the
                                  compensation level, and then press the m


                             C    button.
                                  Once the setting is complete, X is displayed.



     • When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the
       shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed-out
       highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate
       automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing
       n (p. 41) and setting [Safety FE] in [Flash Control] on the 4 tab to [Off].
     • You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by choosing X in the
       FUNC. menu (p. 40), or by accessing n (p. 41) and choosing [Flash Exp.
       Comp] in [Flash Control] on the 4 tab.
     • You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] n screen as follows
       (except when an external flash (sold separately) is attached to the camera).
       - Press and hold the r button for at least one second.
       - When the flash is up, press the r button and immediately press the n
         button.




                                                                               117
Flash



   Shooting with the FE Lock
Just as with the AE lock (p. 93), you can lock the exposure for the flash shots.

                                Raise the flash and set it to h
                                (p. 116).

                                Lock the flash exposure.
                                Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with
                                the exposure locked, and then press the
                                button.
                                The flash fires, and when       is displayed,
                                the flash output level is retained.

                                Compose the shot and shoot.




                                        PY
                                After one shot, FE is unlocked and             is no
                                longer displayed.




                                      O
      • FE: Flash Exposure




   Changing the Flash Timing   C
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.


                                Access the setting screen.
                                Press the n button, choose [Flash
                                Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m
                                button (p. 41).

                                Configure the setting.
                                Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose the
                                desired option (p. 41).
                                1st-    The flash fires immediately after the shutter
                                curtain opens.
                                2nd-    The flash fires immediately before the
                                curtain shutter closes.

118
Still Images

    Shooting RAW Images
RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss
of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use the included
software to adjust RAW images as desired with minimal loss of image quality.

                                    Press the m button, choose     in the menu,
                                    and choose the desired option (p. 40).




     Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal
     image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression
     process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original,
     unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image quality.




                                         PY
     Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with
     essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The data
     cannot be used in this state for viewing or printing on a computer. You must first use



                                       O
     the included software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary
     JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.



                               C
     For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see
     “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.

     Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot.
     The JPEG image can be printed or viewed on a computer without using the
     included software.


     • When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images recorded
       together) to a computer, always use the included software (p. 26).
     • Digital zoom (p. 51), date stamps (p. 54), and red-eye reduction
       (p. 58) are set to [Off] in   and     modes. Additionally, i-Contrast
       (p. 163), My Colors (p. 102) and noise reduction level (p. 96) settings
       are not available.

     • The aspect ratio setting (p. 56) is only applied to JPEG images. RAW images
       are always shot at an aspect ratio of     .
     • To erase      images, display the     image and press p button (p. 152). Choose
       from [Erase     ], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase     +JPEG] to erase the image.
     • The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for RAW images
       is .CR2.


                                                                                      119
Other Settings
                                                  Still Images            Movies

  Changing the IS Mode Settings
                                  Access the setting screen.
                                  Press the n button, choose [IS Settings]
                                  on the 4 tab, and then press the m button
                                  (p. 41).

                                  Configure the setting.
                                  Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the
                                  desired option (p. 41).
                                            Optimal image stabilization for the
                                 Continuous shooting conditions is automatically
                                            applied (Intelligent IS) (p. 49).

                                               Image stabilization is active only at the




                                          PY
                                 Shoot Only*
                                               moment of shooting.

                                 Off           Deactivates image stabilization.



                                        O
                                 *The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie




                                 C
                                   recording.

      • If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
        camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this case,
        set [IS Mode] to [Off].




120
Other Settings


                                                                 Movies
  Deactivating Powered IS
Powered IS reduces slow camera shake that may occur when recording
telephoto movies. However, this option may not produce the expected results
when used for the stronger camera shake that may occur when shooting
while walking or when moving the camera to match subject movement. In this
case, set Powered IS to [Off].

                               Follow the steps in “Changing the IS Mode
                               Settings” (p. 120) to access the [IS Settings]
                               screen.
                               Choose [Powered IS], and then choose [Off]
                               (p. 41).




                                   PY
     • [Powered IS] settings are not applied when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].




                           C     O



                                                                          121
O PY
      C



122
5
Tv, Av, M, C1, C2 Mode
   Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize
   the camera for your shooting style




                                O PY
                          C
• Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
  mode.




                                                                      123
Still Images

    Specific Shutter Speeds (Tv Mode)
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Specifications” in the Getting
Started guide.

                                  Enter M mode.
                                  Set the mode dial to M.

                                  Set the shutter speed.
                                  Turn the z dial to set the shutter speed.



      • With slow shutter speeds, there will be a delay before you can shoot
        again, as the camera processes images to reduce noise.
      • When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS



                                          PY
        Mode] to [Off] (p. 120).
      • Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second.



                                        O
        If you specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the
        speed to 1/2000 second before shooting.


                                 C
      • Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter button
        halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.
        Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is displayed in white,
        or use safety shift (p. 125).

      • M: Time value
      • You can customize camera operation so that turning the 7 dial changes the
        shutter speed (p. 129).




124
Still Images

    Specific Aperture Values (Av Mode)
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Specifications” in the Getting
Started guide.

                                  Enter B mode.
                                  Set the mode dial to B.

                                  Set the aperture value.
                                  Turn the z dial to set the aperture value.



     • Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button
       halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure.
       Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in white,




                                      PY
       or use safety shift (see below).

     • B: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens)



                                    O
     • To avoid exposure problems in M and B modes, you can have the camera




                             C
       automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when standard
       exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the n button and set
       [Safety Shift] on the 4 tab to [On] (p. 41).
       However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
     • You can customize camera operation so that turning the 7 dial changes the
       aperture value (p. 129).




                                                                                125
Still Images

    Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
    Values (M Mode)
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and
aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see
“Specifications” in the Getting Started guide.

                                Enter D mode.
                                Set the mode dial to D.
                                Configure the setting.
                                Turn the z dial to set the shutter speed, and
                                turn the 7 dial to set the aperture value.
                                An exposure level mark based on your
                                specified value is shown on the exposure
                                level indicator for comparison to the standard




                                        PY
                                exposure level.
          Aperture Value        The exposure level mark is shown in orange



                                      O
Shutter Speed
                                when the difference from standard exposure
                                exceeds 2 stops. “–2” or “+2” is displayed in
Standard
Exposure Level
Exposure Level
Mark
                               Corange in the lower right when you press the
                                shutter button halfway.


Exposure Level
Indicator

      • After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level
        may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
      • Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter
        speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the
        same when the flash is up and the mode is set to h.
      • To have both the shutter speed and aperture value automatically
        adjusted to obtain standard exposure, hold the shutter button halfway
        and press the      button. Note that standard exposure may not be
        possible with some settings.




126
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values (M Mode)


     • D: Manual
     • Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method
       (p. 94).
     • You can customize camera operation so that turning the 7 dial changes shutter
       speed and turning the z dial changes the aperture value (p. 129).


   Adjusting the Flash Output
Choose from the three flash levels in D mode.

                                  Enter D mode.
                                  Set the mode dial to D.
                                  Configure the setting.
                                  Raise the flash, press the r button and
                                  immediately turn the z dial to choose the




                                      PY
                                  flash output level, then press the m button.
                                  Once the setting is complete, X is displayed.




                             C      O
     • You can also set the flash level by choosing X in the FUNC. menu (p. 40), or
       by accessing n (p. 41) and choosing [Flash Output] in [Flash Control] on
       the 4 tab.
     • You can set the flash level in M or B mode by accessing n (p. 41),
       choosing [Flash Control] on the 4 tab, and then setting [Flash Mode] to
       [Manual].
     • You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] n screen as follows
       (except when an external flash (sold separately) is attached to the camera).
       - Press and hold the r button for at least one second.
       - When the flash is up, press the r button and immediately press the n
         button.




                                                                                127
Customization for Shooting Styles
                                                     Still Images     Movies

   Customizing Display Information
Customize what information is shown in various display modes (switched by
pressing the p button), and whether or not the information is shown on the
LCD monitor or viewfinder.

                                    Access the setting screen.
                                    Press the n button, choose [Custom
                                    Display] on the 4 tab, and then press the m
                                    button (p. 41).

                                    Configure the setting.
                                    Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                    to choose an item, and then press the m
                                    button. Items you choose for display are




                                            PY
                                    labeled with     .
                                    In [LCD/Viewfinder] (p. 39), you can specify



                                          O
                                    to show or hide this information in LCD
                                    monitor or viewfinder display modes


                                  C (switched by pressing the p button). Press
                                    the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose the screen ( ,
                                    press the m button.
                                                                 , or   ), and then

                                    To hide this information in the display mode
                                    (accessed by pressing the p button), add
                                    to the icon. Note that the current display
                                    mode cannot be modified.
                                    Selected items (labeled with a      ) will be
                                    included in display.

Shooting Info      Displays shooting information (p. 222).

Grid Lines         Displays a reference grid.

Electronic Level   Displays the electronic level (p. 62).
Histogram          Displays a histogram (p. 138), in G, M, B, and D modes.




128
Customization for Shooting Styles



     • Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway and
       return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings
       screen.
     • Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be
       displayed in some shooting modes.

     • Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.



                                                      Still Images        Movies

   Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and
   Control Dial
Assign commonly used functions to the front dial and control dial, by shooting
mode.




                                        PY
                                   Access the setting screen.



                                      O
                                   Press the n button, choose [Set z7
                                   Func.] on the 4 tab, and then press the m


                              C
                                   button (p. 41).

                                   Configure the setting.
                                   Press the qr buttons to choose an item.
                                   To configure the settings, press the op
                                   buttons, choose an item (either press the
                                   opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then
                                   turn the z dial to change the function.




                                                                                   129
Customization for Shooting Styles


  Assignable Functions
Functions you can assign to the front dial and control dial vary depending on
shooting mode. On the setting screen, you can assign aspect ratio switching
(p. 56), white balance correction (p. 100), step zoom (p. 105), or i-Contrast
(p. 163) to modes indicated by      in the following table.
                                                          Shooting Mode
                   Item
                                                D         B             M          G
                                    z          M          B             M
Front Dial 1
                                    7        B,

                                    z          B          B             M
Front Dial 2
                                    7        M,

                                    z
Control Dial




                                           PY
                                    7        M, B         B             M

• B: aperture value (p. 125); M: shutter speed (p. 124)




                                         O
      • When multiple functions are assigned to the 7 dial, press the       button to




                                  C
        switch between them.




130
Customization for Shooting Styles


                                                 Still Images            Movies

Assigning Functions to the                               Button
                                 Access the setting screen.
                                 Press the n button, choose [Set Shortcut
                                 button] on the 4 tab, and then press the m
                                 button (p. 41).

                                 Configure the setting.
                                 Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                 to choose a function to assign, and then
                                 press the m button.

                                 Use the assigned function as
                                 needed.



                                     PY
                                 Press the        button to activate the assigned
                                 function.



                                   O
 • To restore default settings, choose       .
 • Icons labeled with      indicate that the function is not available in the current



                           C
   shooting mode or under current function conditions.
 • When the      or     function is used, each press of the       button records white
   balance data (p. 101), and the white balance settings change to           or    .
 • When the % function is used, each press of the            button adjusts and locks
   the focus, and % is displayed on the screen.
 • Pressing the      button when the        function is used deactivates screen
   display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
   - Press any button (other than the power button)
   - Hold the camera in another orientation
   - Open and close the screen
   - Raise and lower the flash




                                                                                  131
Customization for Shooting Styles


                                                                 Still Images

      Saving Shooting Settings
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings
for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to     or
     . Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting modes
or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained this way.
     Settings that can be saved
•    Shooting modes (G, M, B, and D)
•    Items set in G, M, B, or D modes (pp. 93 – 126)
•    Shooting menu settings
•    Zoom positions
•    Manual focus positions (p. 106)
•    My Menu settings (p. 133)




                                          PY
                                   Enter a shooting mode with
                                   settings you want to save, and


                                        O
                                   change the settings as desired.


                                 C Configure the setting.
                                   Press the n button, choose [Save
                                   Settings] on the 4 tab, and then press the
                                   m button.



                                   Save the settings.
                                   Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   choose the destination, and then press the
                                   m button.




132
Customization for Shooting Styles



    • To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose        or
          , change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
      details are not applied in other shooting modes.

    • To clear information you have saved to    or    and restore default values,
      turn the mode dial to     or    and choose [Reset All] (p. 179).


                                                Still Images         Movies

   Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menus (My
   Menu)
Save up to five commonly used shooting menus as menus on the              tab, for
instant access to all of these items from a single screen.

                                 Access the setting screen.



                                     PY
                                 Press the n button, choose [My Menu
                                 settings] on the  tab, and then press the



                                   O
                                 m button (p. 41).



                            C    Configure the setting.
                                 Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                 choose [Select items], and then press the m
                                 button.
                                 Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                 choose menus to save (up to five), and then
                                 press the m button.
                                     is displayed.
                                 To cancel saving, press the m button.     is
                                 no longer displayed.
                                 Press the n button.




                                                                              133
Customization for Shooting Styles


                                   Rearrange the menu list order, as
                                   needed.
                                   Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   choose [Sort], and then press the m button.
                                   Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   choose a menu to move, and then press the
                                   m button.
                                   Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   change the order, and then press the m
                                   button.
                                   Press the n button.

      • Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not be
        available in some shooting modes.




                                          PY
      • To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the n button in
        Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the qr buttons to choose
        [Yes].




                                 C      O



134
6
Playback Mode
   Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them
   in many ways



                                 O PY
• To prepare the camera for these operations, press the 1 button to enter


                          C
  Playback mode.

     • It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed
       or already edited on a computer, or images from other cameras.




                                                                        135
Still Images        Movies

    Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows.

                               Enter Playback mode.
                               Press the 1 button.
                               Your last shot is displayed.


                               Browse through your images.
                               To view the previous image, press the q
                               button or turn the 7 dial counterclockwise.
                               To view the next image, press the r button or
                               turn the 7 dial clockwise.
                               Press and hold the qr buttons to browse
                               through images quickly. Images appear
                               grainy at this time.




                                    O PY
                               To access Scroll Display mode, turn the 7


                              Cdial rapidly. In this mode, turn the 7 dial to
                               browse through images.
                               To return to single-image display, press the
                               m button.
                               To browse images grouped by shooting date,
                               press the op buttons in Scroll Display
                               mode.
                               Movies are identified by a          icon. To
                               play movies, go to step 3.




136
Viewing


                             Play movies.
                             To start playback, press the m button to
                             access the movie control panel, choose
                             (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7
                             dial), and then press the m button again.

                             Adjust the volume.
                             Press the op buttons to adjust the volume.

                             Pause playback.
                             To pause playback, press the m button. The
                             movie control panel is displayed. To resume
                             playback, press the qr buttons or turn the 7
                             dial to choose     , and then press the m
                             button.




                                 PY
                             After the movie is finished,       is
                             displayed.




                               O
• To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button
  halfway.



                        C
• To deactivate Scroll Display, press the n button, choose [Scroll Display]
  on the 1 tab, and then choose [Off].
• For playback from the last image viewed, press the n button, choose
  [Resume] on the 1 tab, and then [Last seen].
• To change the transition shown between images, press the n button,
  choose [Transition] on the 1 tab, and then press the qr buttons to choose the
  effect.




                                                                           137
Viewing


                                                   Still Images          Movies

    Switching Display Modes
Press the p button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the
information. For details on the information displayed, see p. 222.




 No information is           Simple               Detailed        Enables you to check
    displayed              Information          Information        the focus (p. 139)*
                             Display              Display

*Not shown for movies.

      • Switching display modes by pressing the p button is also possible immediately




                                           PY
        after you shoot, while your shot is displayed. However, simple information
        display is not available. To change the initial display mode, press the n
        button and choose [Review Info] on the 4 tab (p. 66).




                                         O
   Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)


                                   C
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information
display.
   Histogram
                         High       The graph in detailed information display is a
                                    histogram showing the distribution of
                                    brightness in the image. The horizontal axis
                                    represents the degree of brightness, and the
                         Low
                                    vertical axis, how much of the image is at
 Dark           Bright              each level of brightness. Viewing the
                                    histogram is a way to check exposure.
                                    The histogram can also be accessed while
                                    shooting (pp. 128, 224).




138
Viewing


  RGB Histogram
                               To view an RGB histogram, press the o
                               button in detailed information display. The
                               RGB histogram shows the distribution of
                               shades of red, green, and blue in an image.
                               The horizontal axis represents R, G, or B
                               brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of
                               the image is at that level of brightness.
           RGB Histogram       Viewing this histogram enables you to check
                               image color characteristics.
                               Press the o button again to return to detailed
                               information display.

                                                               Still Images

   Checking the Focus



                                   PY
To check the focus of your shots, you can magnify the area of the image that
was in the AF frame at the time of shooting.




                           C     O
                               Access Focus Check.
                               Press the p button (p. 138).
                               A white frame is displayed where the AF
                               frame was when the focus was set.
                               Gray frames are displayed over faces
                               detected later, in Playback mode.
                               The portion of the image in the orange frame
                               is magnified.
                               Switch frames.
                               Move the zoom lever toward k once.
                               The screen at left is displayed.
                               To switch to a different frame when there are
                               multiple frames, press the m button.




                                                                          139
Viewing


          Zoom in or out, or view other image
          areas.
          As you examine the focus, use the zoom
          lever to zoom in or out. Press the opqr
          buttons to adjust the display position.
          Press the n button to restore the original
          display in step 1.




               O PY
          C



140
Browsing and Filtering Images
                                                Still Images           Movies

   Navigating Through Images in an Index
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images you
are looking for.

                                Display images in an index.
                                Move the zoom lever toward g to display
                                images in an index. Moving the lever again
                                will increase the number of images shown.
                                To display fewer images, move the zoom
                                lever toward k. Fewer images are shown
                                each time you move the lever.
                                Choose an image.
                                Turn the 7 dial to scroll through the images.




                                    PY
                                Press the opqr buttons to choose an
                                image.



                                  O
                                An orange frame is displayed around the
                                selected image.


                           C    Press the m button to view the selected
                                image in single-image display.

                                                Still Images           Movies

   Filtering Image Display
To find images on a memory card full of images, you can filter image display,
restricting display to images matching a specific filter. You can also protect
(p. 148) or erase (p. 152) sets of filtered images all at once.
     Jump to Favorites          Displays images tagged as favorites (p. 157).
     Jump Shot Date             Displays the images shot on a specific date.

     Jump to My Category        Displays the images of a specific category (p. 158).

                                Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
     Jump to Still/Movie
                                mode (p. 81).

     Jump 10 Images             Jumps by 10 images at a time.
     Jump 100 Images            Jumps by 100 images at a time.


                                                                                   141
Browsing and Filtering Images


  Filtering Display by               ,     ,     , or
                                     Choose filter conditions.
                                     In single-image display, press the d button,
                                     and then press the op buttons to choose a
                                     search filter (jump method).
                                     When filtering by    ,     , or  , press the
                                     qr buttons to choose a filter condition. Turn
                                     the 7 dial to view only those images that
Filter Conditions                    match your filter conditions.
                                     Press the n button to restore single-
                                     image display.
                                     View the filtered images.
                                     Press the m button to start browsing filtered
                                     images. The jump method and a yellow frame




                                              PY
                                     are displayed.
                                     To view images filtered by your chosen



                                            O
                                     condition, press the qr buttons or turn the 7
                                     dial.


                                    CPressing the d button will display [Filtered
                                     playback settings cleared]. To cancel filtered
                                     playback, press the m button.

      • When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
        filters, those filters will not be available.

      • Options for viewing filtered images (step 2) include “Navigating Through Images
        in an Index” (p. 141), “Viewing Slideshows” (p. 146), and “Magnifying Images”
        (p. 145). You can protect, erase, or print all filtered images at once by choosing
        “All Filtered Images” in “Protecting Images” (p. 148), “Erasing All Images”
        (p. 152), or “Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF)” (p. 208).
      • If you recategorize images (p. 158) or edit them and save them as new images
        (p. 160), a message is displayed and filtered playback ends.




142
Browsing and Filtering Images


  Jumping by            or      Images
                                 Choose a jump method in single-image
                                 display by pressing the d button and then
                                 pressing the op buttons.
                                 Press the qr buttons to use the specified
                                 jump method.
                                 Press the n button to restore single-
                                 image display.
  Using the Front Dial to Jump
Turn the front dial to jump images using the       ,    ,     and      functions.

                                 Choose a jump method in single-image
                                 display by turning the z dial and then
                                 pressing the op buttons.




                                      PY
                                 Turn the z dial to use the specified jump
                                 method.




                             C      O
     • Turning the z dial when browsing images in index display will jump to the
       previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single-image
       display. However, if you have chosen
       switched to    .
                                                 or  , the jump method will be



                                                                      Movies

   Viewing Movie Digest Movies
Movies created in      mode (p. 81) can be viewed by date.

                                 Choose a movie.
                                 Press the n button to choose [Movie
                                 Digest Playback] in the 1 tab, then choose a
                                 date.

                                 Play the movie.
                                 Press the m button to start playback.



                                                                               143
Browsing and Filtering Images


                                                                         Still Images

   Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Grouped images shot in      mode (p. 85) are generally displayed together,
but they can also be viewed individually.

                                    Choose an image group.
                                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose an image labeled         , and then
                                    press the m button.




                                    View individual images in the
                                    group.



                                             PY
                                    Pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7 dial
                                    will display only images in the group.
                                    Pressing the d button will display [Display all




                                   C       O
                                    images]. Press m to cancel group playback.

      • During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly
        (“Navigating Through Images in an Index” (p. 141)) and magnify them
        (“Magnifying Images” (p. 145)). You can protect, erase, or print all images in a
        group at once by choosing “All Images in Group” in “Protecting Images” (p. 148),
        “Erasing All Images” (p. 152), or “Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF)”
        (p. 208).
      • To ungroup images so that you can view them individually, press the n
        button, choose [Group Images] on the 1 tab, and then choose [Off] (p. 41).
        However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during individual playback.




144
Image Viewing Options
                                                                  Still Images

Magnifying Images
                              Magnify an image.
                              Moving the zoom lever toward k will zoom in
                              and magnify the image. You can magnify
                              images up to about 10x by continuing to hold
                              the zoom lever.
                              To zoom out, move the zoom lever toward
                              g. You can return to single-image display
                              by continuing to hold it.

                              Move the display position and
                              switch images as needed.
                              To move the display position, press the




                                   PY
Approximate Position of       opqr buttons.
       Displayed Area
                              To switch to other images while zoomed, turn
                              the 7 dial.




                          C      O
 • You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the
   n button.




                                                                             145
Image Viewing Options


                                                    Still Images          Movies

   Viewing Slideshows
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.

                                    Access the setting screen.
                                    Press the n button and choose
                                    [Slideshow] on the 1 tab (p. 41).




                                    Configure the setting.
                                    Choose a menu item to configure, and then
                                    choose the desired option (p. 41).




                                            PY
                                    Start automatic playback.
                                    Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to




                                  C       O
                                    choose [Start], and then press the m button.
                                    The slideshow will start a few seconds after
                                    [Loading image...] is displayed.
                                    Press the n button to stop the
                                    slideshow.

      • The camera’s power-saving functions (p. 36) are deactivated during
        slideshows.

      • To pause or resume slideshows, press the m button.
      • You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the qr buttons or
        turning the 7 dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the qr buttons down.
      • [Play Time] cannot be modified when [Bubble] is chosen in [Effect].
      • You can also start slideshows from single-image display by pressing and
        holding the m button and immediately pressing the          button.




146
Image Viewing Options


                                                               Still Images

   Auto Playback of Similar Images (Smart
   Shuffle)
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images similar to it that
you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the
camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back
images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many
shots, in many kinds of scenes.

                               Choose Smart Shuffle.
                               Press the n button, choose [Smart
                               Shuffle] on the 1 tab, and then press the m
                               button (p. 41).
                               Four candidate images are displayed.




                                 O PY
                               Choose an image.
                               Press the opqr buttons to choose the



                           C
                               image you want to view next.
                               Your chosen image is displayed in the center,
                               surrounded by the next four candidate
                               images.
                               For full-screen display of the center image,
                               press the m button. To restore the original
                               display, press the m button again.
                               Press the n button to restore single-
                               image display.

     • Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart
       Shuffle.
     • [Smart Shuffle] is not available in the following cases:
       - There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
       - An unsupported image is currently displayed
       - The current image is being played in filtered playback




                                                                          147
Still Images         Movies

    Protecting Images
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
(pp. 152).

   Choosing a Selection Method
                                  Access the setting screen.
                                  Press the n button, and then choose
                                  [Protect] on the 1 tab (p. 41).




                                  Choose a selection method.
                                  Choose a menu item and a setting as desired
                                  (p. 41).




                                          PY
                                  To return to the menu screen, press the
                                  n button.




                                 C      O
      • Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the
        card (pp. 171, 172).

      • Protected images cannot be erased by the camera. To erase them, cancel
        protection settings first.




148
Protecting Images



Choosing Images Individually
                           Choose [Select].
                           Following step 2 on p. 148, choose [Select]
                           and press the m button.
                           Choose an image.
                           Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                           choose an image, and then press the m
                           button.    is displayed.
                           To cancel protection, press the m button
                           again.    is no longer displayed.
                           Repeat this process to specify other images.
                           Protect the images.
                           Press the n button. A confirmation



                               PY
                           message is displayed.
                           Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to



                             O
                           choose [OK], and then press the m button.



                      C
 • Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn
   the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.




                                                                   149
Protecting Images



  Selecting a Range
                    Choose [Select Range].
                    Following step 2 on p. 148, choose [Select
                    Range] and press the m button.
                    Choose a starting image.
                    Press the m button.




                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                    choose an image, and then press the m
                    button.




                         O PY
                    C
                    Choose an ending image.
                    Press the r button to choose [Last image],
                    and then press the m button.




                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                    choose an image, and then press the m
                    button.
                    Images before the first image cannot be
                    selected as the last image.




150
Protecting Images


                               Protect the images.
                               Press the p button to choose [Protect], and
                               then press the m button.




 • You can also choose the first or last image by turning the 7 dial when the top
   screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.



Specifying All Images at Once
                               Choose [All Images].
                               Following step 2 on p. 148, choose [All




                                   PY
                               Images] and press the m button.
                               Protect the images.


                                 O
                               Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose [Protect], and then press the m


                         C     button.




 • To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of
   “Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”.




                                                                             151
Still Images        Movies

    Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.

                              Choose an image to erase.
                              Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                              choose an image.
                              Erase the images.
                              Press the a button.
                              After [Erase?] is displayed, press the qr
                              buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Erase],
                              and then press the m button.
                              The current image is now erased.
                              To cancel erasure, press the qr buttons or
                              turn the 7 dial to choose [Cancel], and then




                                     PY
                              press the m button.

   Erasing All Images


                             C     O
You can erase all images at once. Be careful when erasing images, because
they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (p. 148) cannot be
erased.
  Choosing a Selection Method
                              Access the setting screen.
                              Press the n button, and then choose
                              [Erase] on the 1 tab (p. 41).




                              Choose a selection method.
                              Choose a menu item and a setting as desired
                              (p. 41).
                              Press the op buttons to choose a selection
                              method, and then press the m button.
                              To return to the menu screen, press the
                              n button.
152
Erasing Images


Choosing Images Individually
                     Choose [Select].
                     Following step 2 on p. 152, choose [Select]
                     and press the m button.
                     Choose an image.
                     Once you follow step 2 on p. 149 to choose
                     an image,     is displayed.
                     To cancel erasure, press the m button
                     again.    is no longer displayed.
                     Repeat this process to specify other images.

                     Erase the images.
                     Press the n button. A confirmation




                          PY
                     message is displayed.
                     Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                     choose [OK], and then press the m button.


Selecting a Range
                    C   O
                     Choose [Select Range].
                     Following step 2 on p. 152, choose [Select
                     Range] and press the m button.

                     Choose images.
                     Follow steps 2 – 3 on p. 150 to specify
                     images.
                     Erase the images.
                     Press the p button to choose [Erase], and
                     then press the m button.




                                                               153
Erasing Images


 Specifying All Images at Once
                      Choose [All Images].
                      Following step 2 on p. 152, choose [All
                      Images] and press the m button.
                      Erase the images.
                      Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                      choose [OK], and then press the m button.




                           O PY
                     C



154
Still Images        Movies

    Rotating Images
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.

                                Choose [Rotate].
                                Press the n button, and then choose
                                [Rotate] on the 1 tab (p. 41).




                                Rotate the image.
                                Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                choose an image.
                                The image is rotated 90° each time you press
                                the m button.
                                To return to the menu screen, press the




                                    PY
                                n button.




                                  O
     • Movies with an image quality of      or    cannot be rotated.
     • Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (see below).


                            C
   Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic rotation by the camera, which
rotates images shot in vertical orientation so they are displayed vertically on
the camera.

                                Press the n button, choose [Auto
                                Rotate] on the 1 tab, and then choose [Off]
                                (p. 41).




                                                                            155
Rotating Images



      • Images cannot be rotated when you set [Auto Rotate] to [Off].
        Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the original
        orientation.
      • In Smart Shuffle (p. 147) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off],
        images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated images
        will be displayed in the rotated orientation.




                                       O PY
                                C



156
Still Images         Movies

    Image Categories
You can tag images as favorites and assign them to My Category (p. 158). By
choosing a category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following
operations to all of those images.
• Viewing (p. 136), Viewing Slideshows (p. 146), Protecting Images (p. 148),
  Erasing Images (p. 152), Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF) (p. 208)

   Tagging Images as Favorites
                                 Choose [Favorites].
                                 Press the n button, and then choose
                                 [Favorites] on the 1 tab (p. 41).




                                     PY
                                 Choose an image.
                                 Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                 choose an image, and then press the m




                            C      O
                                 button.    is displayed.
                                 To untag the image, press the m button
                                 again.    is no longer displayed.
                                 Repeat this process to choose additional
                                 images.
                                 Finish the setup process.
                                 Press the n button. A confirmation
                                 message is displayed.
                                 Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                 choose [OK], and then press the m button.



     • Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode
       or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.

     • Favorite images will have a three-star rating (         ) when transferred
       to computers running Windows 7 or Windows Vista. (Does not apply to movies
       or RAW images.)


                                                                              157
Image Categories



   Organizing Images by Category (My Category)
You can organize images into categories. Note that images are automatically
categorized at the time of shooting, according to shooting conditions.
   :Images with detected faces, or images shot in I or V mode.
   :Images detected as      ,    , or   in A mode, or images shot in J,
      O, or    mode.
   : Images shot in    , w, S, P, or t mode.

  Choosing a Selection Method
                               Access the setting screen.
                               Press the n button, and then choose
                               [My Category] on the 1 tab (p. 41).




                                    O PY
                               Choose a selection method.
                               Choose a menu item and a setting as desired


                             C (p. 41).
                               To return to the menu screen, press the
                               n button.


  Choosing Images Individually
                               Choose [Select].
                               Following step 2 above, choose [Select] and
                               press the m button.

                               Choose an image.
                               Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose an image.




158
Image Categories


                                Choose a category.
                                Press the op buttons to choose the
                                category, and then press the m button.
                                is displayed.
                                To cancel selection, press the m button
                                again.     is no longer displayed.
                                Repeat this process to choose additional
                                images.
                                Finish the setup process.
                                Press the n button. A confirmation
                                message is displayed. Press the qr buttons
                                or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then
                                press the m button.




                                    PY
  • Images will not be assigned to a category if you switch to Shooting mode
    or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 4.

Selecting a Range

                           C      O
                                Choose [Select Range].
                                Following step 2 on p. 158, choose [Select
                                Range] and press the m button.

                                Choose images.
                                Follow steps 2 – 3 on p. 150 to specify images.
                                Choose a category.
                                Press the p button to choose the type of
                                image, and then press the qr buttons or turn
                                the 7 dial to choose a category.

                                Finish the setup process.
                                Press the p button to choose [Select], and
                                then press the m button.
  • You can clear the selection of all images in the [Select Range] category by
    choosing [Deselect] in step 4.


                                                                                  159
Still Images

    Editing Still Images
      • Image editing (pp. 160 – 164) is only available when the memory
        card has sufficient free space.


   Resizing Images
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.

                               Choose [Resize].
                               Press the n button, and then choose
                               [Resize] on the 1 tab (p. 41).

                               Choose an image.
                               Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose an image, and then press the m




                                      PY
                               button.
                               Choose an image size.


                                    O
                               Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose the size, and then press the m


                              Cbutton.
                               [Save new image?] is displayed.


                               Save the new image.
                               Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose [OK], and then press the m button.
                               The image is now saved as a new file.



                               Review the new image.
                               Press the n button. [Display new
                               image?] is displayed.
                               Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose [Yes], and then press the m button.
                               The saved image is now displayed.

160
Editing Still Images



     • Editing is not possible for images saved as        in step 3.
     • RAW images cannot be edited.

     • Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.




   Cropping
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.

                                  Choose [Trimming].
                                  Press the n button, and then choose
                                  [Trimming] on the 1 tab (p. 41).

                                  Choose an image.



                                        PY
                                  Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose an image, and then press the m



                                      O
                                  button.
Cropping Area



                                  C
      Resolution After Cropping
                                  Adjust the cropping area.
                                  A frame is displayed around the portion of the
                                  image to be cropped.
                                  The original image is shown in the upper left,
                                  and a preview of the image as cropped is
                                  shown in the lower right.
                                  To resize the frame, move the zoom lever.
                                  To move the frame, press the opqr buttons.
                                  To change the frame orientation, press the
            Preview of Image      m button.
               After Cropping     Faces detected in the image are shown with
                                  gray frames around them (in the upper-left
                                  image), which can be used for cropping.
                                  Switch between frames as needed by turning
                                  the 7 dial.
                                  Press the n button.

                                  Save as a new image and review.
                                  Follow steps 4 – 5 on p. 160.

                                                                            161
Editing Still Images



      • Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of            (p. 57) or
        resized to      (p. 160).
      • RAW images cannot be edited.

      • Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping.
      • Cropped images will have a smaller resolution than uncropped images.



   Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate
file. For details on each option, see p. 102.

                                     Choose [My Colors].
                                     Press the n button, and then choose
                                     [My Colors] on the 1 tab (p. 41).




                                              PY
                                     Choose an image.
                                     Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to




                                    C
                                     button.
                                            O
                                     choose an image, and then press the m


                                     Choose an option.
                                     Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                     choose an option, and then press the m
                                     button.

                                     Save as a new image and review.
                                     Follow steps 4 – 5 on p. 160.

      • Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little
        lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color.
      • Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.

      • The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color of
        images shot using My Colors (p. 102).




162
Editing Still Images



   Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects stand
out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the image as a
separate file.

                                   Choose [i-Contrast].
                                   Press the n button, and then choose [i-
                                   Contrast] on the 1 tab (p. 41).

                                   Choose an image.
                                   Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   choose an image, and then press the m
                                   button.




                                       PY
                                   Choose an option.
                                   Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to




                              C      O
                                   choose an option, and then press the m
                                   button.

                                   Save as a new image and review.
                                   Follow steps 4 – 5 on p. 160.

     • For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
       images to appear grainy.
     • Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
     • RAW images cannot be edited this way.

     • If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using
       [Low], [Medium], or [High].




                                                                                  163
Editing Still Images



   Correcting Red-Eye
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.

                                  Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
                                  Press the n button, and then choose
                                  [Red-Eye Correction] on the 1 tab (p. 41).

                                  Choose an image.
                                  Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose an image.

                                  Correct the image.
                                  Press the m button.
                                  Red-eye detected by the camera is now




                                         PY
                                  corrected, and frames are displayed around
                                  corrected image areas.



                                       O
                                  Enlarge or reduce images as needed. Follow
                                  the steps in “Magnifying Images” (p. 145).


                                C Save as a new image and review.
                                  Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                  to choose [New File], and then press the m
                                  button.
                                  The image is now saved as a new file.
                                  Follow step 5 on p. 160.


      • Some images may not be corrected accurately.
      • To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
        [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.
      • Protected images cannot be overwritten.
      • RAW images cannot be edited this way.
      • Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in           , but
        the original image cannot be overwritten.




164
Movies

    Editing Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.

                              Choose *.
                              Following steps 1 – 3 on p. 136, choose *
                              and press the m button.
                              The movie editing panel and editing bar are
                              now displayed.


Movie Editing Panel

                              Specify portions to cut.
                              Press the op buttons to choose              or     .
                              To view the portions you can cut (identified by
                                   on the screen), press the qr buttons or




                                  PY
                              turn the 7 dial to move . Cut the beginning
                              of the movie (from       ) by choosing        , and
                              cut the end of the movie by choosing            .
    Movie Editing Bar



                         C      O
                              Even if you move to a position other than a
                                   mark, choosing
                              portion from the nearest
                              choosing
                                                         will only cut the
                                                               to the left, and
                                             will cut the portion from the
                              nearest      to the right.

                              Review the edited movie.
                              Press the op buttons to choose        , and
                              then press the m button. The edited movie is
                              now played.
                              To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
                              To cancel editing, press the op buttons to
                              choose      . Press the m button, choose
                              [OK] (either press the qr buttons or turn the
                              7 dial), and then press the m button again.




                                                                             165
Editing Movies


                                Save the edited movie.
                                Press the op buttons to choose     , and then
                                press the m button.
                                Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                to choose [New File], and then press the m
                                button.
                                The movie is now saved as a new file.

      • To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]
        in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
      • Only [Overwrite] is available when memory cards lack sufficient free
        space.
      • Movies may not be saved if the battery runs out while saving is in
        progress.
      • When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery or an




                                       PY
        AC adapter kit (sold separately, p. 182).




                               C     O



166
7
Setting Menu
 Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater
 convenience



                       O PY
                  C



                                                    167
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Functions can be configured on the 3 tab. Customize commonly used
functions as desired, for greater convenience (p. 41).

   Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.

                                   Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].




      • Operation can also be silenced by holding down the p button as you turn the
        camera on.
      • Sound is not played during movies if you mute camera sounds (p. 136). To




                                          PY
        restore sound during movies, press the o button. Adjust volume with the op
        buttons, as needed.


   Adjusting the Volume

                                 C      O
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.

                                   Choose [Volume], and then press the m
                                   button.
                                   Choose an item, and then press the qr
                                   buttons to adjust the volume.




168
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions



   Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.

                                  Choose [Sound Options], and then press the
                                  m button.
                                  Choose an item, and then press the qr
                                  buttons to choose an option.
                                        Preset sounds
                                 1, 2
                                        (cannot be modified)
                                        Preset sounds
                                 3      Can be changed by using the included
                                        software.

    • The default shutter sound is used in   mode (p. 85), regardless of any
      changes to [Shutter Sound].



   Hiding Hints and Tips

                                     O PY
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. menu (p. 40) or


                             C
Menu (p. 41) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.

                                  Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose [Off].




                                                                               169
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions



   Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.

                                     Choose [LCD Brightness], and then press the
                                     qr buttons to adjust the brightness.




      • For maximum brightness, press and hold the p button for at least one second
        when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display. (This
        will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the 3 tab.) To restore the original
        brightness, press and hold the p button again for at least one second or restart
        the camera.




                                             PY
   Start-up Screen


                                           O
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as follows.



                                   C Choose [Start-up Image], and then press the
                                     m button.
                                     Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                     choose an option.
                                           No start-up image

                                           Preset images
                                    1, 2
                                           (cannot be modified)

                                           Preset images
                                    3      Assign desired shots, or use the included
                                           software to change the image.




170
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions


  Customizing the Start-up Screen
                                  Access the [Start-up Image] screen
                                  in Playback mode.
                                  Press the 1 button.
                                  Following the previous procedure, choose [3]
                                  and press the m button.


                                  Choose one of your shots.
                                  Choose an image and press the m button.
                                  After [Register?] is displayed, choose [OK]
                                  (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7
                                  dial), and then press the m button.




                                      PY
     • The previous start-up setting is overwritten when you assign a new
       start-up image.




                             C      O
     • You can assign the operating sounds and start-up images for your camera from
       the included software. For details, refer to the Software Guide.



   Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you
should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
An Eye-Fi card (p. 212) contains software on the card itself. Before formatting
an Eye-Fi card, install the software on a computer.

                                  Access the [Format] screen.
                                  Choose [Format], and then press the m
                                  button.

                                  Choose [OK].
                                  Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose [OK], and then press the m button.

                                                                               171
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions


                                     Format the memory card.
                                     To begin the formatting process, press the
                                     op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose
                                     [OK], and then press the m button.
                                     When formatting is finished, [Memory card
                                     formatting complete] is displayed. Press the
                                     m button.

      • Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
        management information on the card and does not erase the data
        completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take
        steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically
        destroying cards.

      • The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the
        advertised capacity.




                                             PY
  Low-Level Formatting


                                           O
Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is displayed,
the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is slower,


                                   C
continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops. Low-level
formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.

                                     Perform low-level formatting.
                                     On the screen in step 2 on p. 171, press the
                                     op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose
                                     [Low Level Format], and then select this
                                     option (mark with a     ) by pressing the qr
                                     buttons.
                                     Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                     to choose [OK], press the m button, and
                                     then follow step 3 on p. 171 to format (low-
                                     level format) the memory card.
      • Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (p. 171),
        because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card.
      • You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this case,
        all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally.

172
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions



   File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) and
saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change how the
camera assigns file numbers.

                                   Choose [File Numbering], and then choose
                                   an option.
                                                    Images are numbered
                                                    consecutively (until the 9999th shot
                                  Continuous
                                                    is taken/saved) even if you switch
                                                    memory cards.

                                                    Image numbering is reset to 0 if you
                                  Auto Reset        switch memory cards, or when a
                                                    new folder is created.




                                       PY
     • Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered
       consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted
       memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted
       (p. 171)) memory card.



                                     O
     • Refer to the Software Guide for information on the card folder structure and
       image formats.


   Date-Based Image Storage  C
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.

                                   Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
                                   [Daily].
                                   Images will now be saved in folders created
                                   on the shooting date.




                                                                                   173
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions



   Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the
1 button in Shooting mode (p. 36). To have the lens retracted immediately
after you press the 1 button, set the retraction timing to [0 sec.].

                                     Choose [Lens Retract], and then choose [0
                                     sec.].




   Power-Saving Adjustment




                                             PY
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power
Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (p. 36).




                                           O
                                     Access the [Power Saving] screen.


                                   C
                                     Choose [Power Saving], and then press the
                                     m button.

                                     Configure the settings.
                                     After choosing an item, press the qr buttons
                                     to adjust it as needed.

      • To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
        [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].

      • The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off].




174
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions



   World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you
travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that
time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/
Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time (p. 18) and your
home time zone.

                                    Specify your destination.
                                    Choose [Time Zone], and then press the m
                                    button.
                                    Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose [     World], and then press the m
                                    button.
                                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to




                                        PY
                                    choose the destination.
                                    To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead),



                                      O
                                    press the op buttons to choose        .
                                    Press the m button.


                              C     Switch to the destination time
                                    zone.
                                    Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose [     World], and then press the
                                    n button.
                                         is now shown on the shooting screen
                                    (p. 222).

     • Adjusting the date or time while in   mode (p. 19) will automatically update
       your [   Home] time and date.




                                                                                 175
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions



   Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.

                                Access the [Date/Time] screen.
                                Choose [Date/Time], and then press the m
                                button.
                                Configure the setting.
                                Press the qr buttons to choose an item, and
                                then adjust the setting, either by pressing the
                                op buttons or turning the 7 dial.

   Metric/Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the MF indicator (p. 106) and




                                         PY
zoom bar (p. 44) from m/cm to ft/in as needed.

                                Choose [Distance Units], and then choose [ft/


                                       O
                                in].



                               C
   Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (p. 128) to help you level
the camera in advance.

                                Level the camera.
                                Mount the camera on a tripod and make sure
                                it is level.




176
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions


                                  Access the [Electronic Level]
                                  screen.
                                  Choose [Electronic Level], and then press the
                                  m button.

                                  Calibrate the electronic level.
                                  Choose [Calibrate] and press the m button.
                                  A confirmation message is displayed.
                                  Choose [OK], and then press the m button.
  Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is not
possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.

                                  Choose [Electronic Level], and then press the




                                      PY
                                  m button.
                                  Choose [Reset], and then press the m
                                  button.


                                    O
                                  Once the electronic level has been reset, the



                             C
                                  menu screen is displayed again.


   Setting Copyright Information to Record in
   Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.

                                  Access the setting screen.
                                  Choose [Copyright Info], and then press the
                                  m button.
                                  Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose [Enter Author’s Name] or [Enter
                                  Copyright Details], and then press the m
                                  button.




                                                                               177
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions


                                    Enter a name.
                                    Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                    to choose a character, and then press the m
                                    button to enter it.
                                    Up to 63 characters can be used.
                                    Press the a button to delete single
                                    characters.
                                    Turn the z dial or choose       or     and
                                    press the m button to move the cursor.
                                    Save the settings.
                                    Press the n button. [Accept changes?]
                                    is displayed.
                                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose [Yes], and then press the m button.
                                    The information set here will now be recorded




                                            PY
                                    in images.

      • To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the screen



                                          O
        in step 1, and then press the m button.




                                   C
      • You can also use the included software (p. 26) to enter, change, and delete
        copyright information. Some characters entered with the included software may
        not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images.
      • You can view, change, and delete copyright information recorded in images by
        using the included software after saving images to a computer.

  Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same time
as follows.

                                    Follow step 1 on p. 177 and choose [Delete
                                    Copyright Info].
                                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                    choose [OK], and then press the m button.




      • The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.



178
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions



   Display Language
Change the display language as needed.

                                 Access the [Language] screen.
                                 Choose [Language         ], and then press the
                                 m button.

                                 Configure the setting.
                                 Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial
                                 to choose a language, and then press the m
                                 button.

     • You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and
       holding the m button and immediately pressing the n button.




                                     PY
   Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the 3 tab.
• [Video System] (p. 187)
• [Ctrl via HDMI] (p. 188)
• [Eye-Fi Settings] (p. 212)
                            C      O
   Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings.

                                 Access the [Reset All] screen.
                                 Choose [Reset All], and then press the m
                                 button.

                                 Restore default settings.
                                 Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                 choose [OK], and then press the m button.
                                 Default settings are now restored.




                                                                             179
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions


      • The following functions are not restored to default settings.
        - 3 tab settings [Time Zone] (p. 175), [Date/Time] (p. 176), [Language ]
          (p. 179), [Video System] (p. 186), and the image assigned to [Start-up Image]
          (p. 170)
        - Custom white balance data you have recorded (p. 101)
        - Colors chosen in Color Accent (p. 78) or Color Swap (p. 79)
        - Shooting mode chosen in K (p. 68) or            (p. 71) mode
        - Exposure compensation (p. 93) setting
        - The movie mode (p. 88)
        - Calibrated value for the electronic level (p. 176)
        - Copyright information (p. 177)




                                          O PY
                                   C



180
8
Accessories
 Use included accessories effectively and enjoy the
 camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories


                         PY
 and other compatible accessories sold separately



                  C    O



                                                      181
Tips on Using Included Accessories

   Effective Battery and Charger Use
• Charge the battery on (or immediately before) the day of
  use
  Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when
  they are not used.
  You can easily check the charge state of the battery by
  attaching the cover so that o is visible on a charged battery,
  and attaching it so that o is not visible on an uncharged
  battery.
• Long-term battery storage
  After using up all remaining battery power, remove the battery from the camera.
  Store the battery with the cover attached. Storing a partially charged battery over
  extended periods (about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance.
• Using the battery charger abroad
  The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For
  power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the




                                           PY
  plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may
  damage the battery.




                                         O
    Optional Accessories


                                  C
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.

   Power Supplies
                                Battery Pack NB-10L
                                  Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
                                Battery Charger CB-2LC
                                  Charger for Battery Pack NB-10L

                                AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80
                                  For powering the camera using household
                                  power. Recommended when using the
                                  camera over extended periods, or when
                                  connecting the camera to a printer or
                                  computer. Cannot be used to charge the
                                  camera battery.



182
Optional Accessories



 • The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with 100
   – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
 • For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available
   adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for
   traveling, which may damage the battery.


Flash Units
                         Speedlite 580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II
                           Shoe-mounted flash unit that enables many
                           styles of flash photography.


                         Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
                           Prevents unnatural shadows next to subjects




                                PY
                           during vertical shooting. Includes Off-Camera
                           Shoe Cord OC-E3.




                       C      O
                         Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2
                           Enables wireless control of slave Speedlite
                           flash units.


                         Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
                         Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX
                           External macro flash units that enable many
                           styles of macro flash photography.
                           The Macro Twin Lite requires Macrolite
                           Adapter MLA-DC1, Off-Camera Shoe Cord
                           OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold
                           separately) for attachment to the camera.
                           The Macro Ring Lite requires Macrolite
                           Adapter MLA-DC1 (sold separately) for
                           attachment to the camera.




                                                                      183
Optional Accessories


                       Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3
                         Used to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to the
                         camera.


                       Bracket BKT-DC1
                         Used to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to the
                         camera.


                       Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1
                         Used to attach a Macro Ring Lite or Macro
                         Twin Lite flash to the camera.




                                 PY
  Other Accessories
                       Soft Case SC-DC75




                        C      O
                         Protects the camera from dust and scratches.
                         Handle with care to prevent leather
                         discoloration.

                       Waterproof Case WP-DC44
                        For underwater photography at depths of up
                        to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for shooting
                        in the rain, at the beach, or on ski slopes.

                       Waterproof Case Weight WW-DC1
                        Prevents the waterproof case from floating
                        during underwater photography.


                       HDMI Cable HTC-100
                         For connecting the camera to an HDMI input
                         of a high-definition TV.



184
Optional Accessories


                            Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
                              Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
                              playback on the larger TV screen.


                            Remote Switch RS60-E3
                              Enables remote shutter button operation
                              (pressing the button halfway or all the way
                              down).

                            Lens Hood LH-DC70
                               Prevents extraneous light outside the angle
                               of view from entering the lens and causing
                               flares or ghosting, which reduce image
                               quality.




                                   PY
                            Filter Adapter FA-DC58C
                               Adapter required when mounting a 58 mm
                               filter.




                          C      O
                            Canon Lens Filter (58 mm dia.)
                              Protects the lens and enables a variety of
                              shooting effects.

  • A lens hood and filter adapter cannot be attached to the camera at the same
    time.



Printers
                            Canon PictBridge-Compatible Printers
                              Printing images without a computer is
                              possible by connecting the camera to a
                              Canon PictBridge-compatible printer.
                              For details, visit your nearest Canon dealer.
SELPHY       PIXMA
 Series      Series




                                                                             185
Using Optional Accessories
                                                 Still Images          Movies

   Playback on a TV
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
      • Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (p. 224).



  Playback on a Standard-Definition TV
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the
TV as you control the camera.

                                  Make sure the camera and TV are



                                          PY
                                  off.

                                  Connect the camera to the TV.

                                        O
                White   Red
 Yellow
Yellow                            On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into the


                    Red
                    White
                                 Cvideo inputs as shown.



                                  On the camera, open the terminal cover and
                                  insert the cable plug fully into the camera
                                  terminal.



                                  Turn the TV on and switch to video
                                  input.
                                  Switch the TV input to the video input you
                                  connected the cable to in step 2.




186
Using Optional Accessories


                                  Turn the camera on.
                                  Press the 1 button to turn the camera on.
                                  Images from the camera are now displayed
                                  on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the
                                  camera screen.)
                                  When finished, turn off the camera and TV
                                  before disconnecting the cable.

     • Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format
       (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the video output
       format, press the n button and choose [Video System] on the
       3 tab.

     • When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing
       shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when
       using the camera screen.




                                      PY
  Playback on a High-Definition TV
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold

Movies shot at a resolution of   or
                                    O
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV.



                             C
                                        can be viewed in high-definition.

                                  Make sure the camera and TV are
                                  off.

                                  Connect the camera to the TV.
                                  On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into the
                                  HDMI input as shown.



                                  On the camera, open the terminal cover and
                                  insert the cable plug fully into the camera
                                  terminal.




                                                                                187
Using Optional Accessories


                                  Display images.
                                  Follow steps 3 – 4 on p. 186 to display
                                  images.

      • Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an
        HDTV.


  Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote
Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback
(including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control.
In this case, you will need to adjust some TV settings. For details, refer to the
TV user manual.

                                  Configure the settings.
                                  Press the n button, choose [Ctrl via




                                          PY
                                  HDMI] on the 3 tab, and then choose [Enable]
                                  (p. 41).



                                        O
                                  Connect the camera to the TV.


                                 C
                                  Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 187 to connect the
                                  camera to the TV.

                                  Display images.
                                  Turn on the TV. On the camera, press the 1
                                  button.
                                  Images from the camera are now displayed
                                  on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the
                                  camera screen.)

                                  Control the camera with the TV
                                  remote.
                                  Press the qr buttons on the remote to
                                  browse images.
                                  To display the camera control panel, press
                                  the OK/Select button. Select control panel
                                  items by pressing the qr buttons to choose
                                  an item, and then pressing the OK/Select
                                  button again.

188
Using Optional Accessories


  Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV
         Return               Closes the menu.

                              Displays sets of images shot in  mode (p. 85). (Only
         Group Playback
                              displayed when a grouped image is selected.)

                              Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie is
         Play Movie
                              selected.)

                              Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during
  .      Slideshow
                              playback, press the qr buttons on the remote control.

         Index Playback       Displays multiple images in an index.

 l Change Display             Switches display modes (p. 39).

      • Pressing any buttons on the camera will switch control to the camera itself,
        which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display.
      • The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an HDMI




                                       PY
        CEC-compatible TV.




                                     O
   Powering the Camera with Household Power


                              C
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.

                                   Make sure the camera is off.

                                   Connect the adapter to the coupler.
                                   Insert the adapter plug fully into the coupler.




                                                                                 189
Using Optional Accessories


                                Insert the coupler.
                                Follow step 2 on p. 15 to open the cover, and
                                then insert the coupler as shown until it locks
                                into place.




                                Close the cover ( ) making sure the coupler
                                cable fits into the coupler cable port ( ) and
                                press downward until it clicks into place.




                                       PY
         Coupler Cable Port




                               C     O
                                Connect the power cord.
                                Insert one end of the power cord into the
                                compact power adapter, and then plug the
                                other end into a power outlet.
                                Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
                                When finished, turn the camera off and
                                unplug the power cord from the outlet.

      • Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the
        camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera.
      • Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so
        could result in malfunction or damage to the product.




190
Using Optional Accessories


                                                   Still Images           Movies

   Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
For wide-angle shots of backlit subjects without using the flash, attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC70 to prevent light outside the angle of view from
entering the lens.

                                   Attach the hood.
                                   Align the lens hood mark ( ) with the
                                   camera mark ( ), and turn the lens hood in
                                   the direction of the arrow until it locks in
                                   place.
                                   To remove the lens hood, turn it the opposite
                                   direction.




                                     O PY
                              C
     • Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens hood
       is attached.

     • The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the camera at the same
       time.




                                                                                   191
Using Optional Accessories


                                                    Still Images           Movies

   Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)
Attaching a lens filter to the camera protects the lens and allows you to shoot
with various effects. To attach a lens filter, you will need Filter Adapter FA-
DC58C (sold separately).

                                    Attach the filter adapter.
                                    Align the notches on the camera and the filter
                                    adapter and turn the adapter in the direction
                                    of the arrow until locked.
                                    To remove the filter adapter, turn it in the
                                    opposite direction.


                                    Attach a filter.



                                            PY
                                    Turn the filter in the direction of the arrow to
                                    attach it to the camera.
                                    Make sure not to attach the filter too tightly.




                                   C      O
                                    Doing so could prevent removal of the filter
                                    and damage the camera.


      • We recommend the use of genuine Canon filters (58 mm dia.).
      • When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option
        [Safety MF] to [On].
      • If you use the built-in flash with the filter adapter attached, portions of
        the image may appear darker.
      • When using the filter adapter, be sure to use only one filter at a time.
        Attaching multiple filters, or accessories such as a heavy lens, may
        cause the attachments to fall off or damage the camera or adapter.
      • Do not grip the filter adapter tightly.
      • Remove the filter adapter when not using a filter.
      • The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the camera at the same
        time.




192
Using Optional Accessories


                                                                        Still Images

   Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
An optional Remote Switch RS60-E3 can be used to avoid camera shake that
may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This optional
accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.

                                   Connect the remote switch.
                                   Make sure the camera is off.
                                   Open the terminal cover and insert the
                                   remote switch plug.

                                   Shoot.
                                   To shoot, press the release button on the
                                   remote switch.




                                        PY
     • Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported.


                                      O
                              C
   Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
                                                   Still Images           Movies



More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional Speedlite
EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the optional Speedlite
320EX flash is available.

     • This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series functions.
     • Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not fire
       at all, in some cases.
     • Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units) or
       flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and may
       damage the camera.

     • Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional information.




                                                                                   193
Using Optional Accessories


                                              Still Images        Movies
  Speedlite 580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II
These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
flash photography needs.

                                Attach the flash unit to the hot
                                shoe.
                                Turn the flash on, and then turn the
                                camera on.
                                A red h icon is now displayed.
                                The flash pilot lamp will light up when the
                                flash is ready.

                                Choose shooting mode G, M,



                                       PY
                                B, or D.
                                Flash settings can only be configured in



                                     O
                                these modes. In other modes, the flash is
                                adjusted and fired automatically, as needed.


                               CSet the white balance to h (p. 100).

                                Configure settings for the external
                                flash.
                                Press the n button, choose [Flash
                                Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m
                                button.
                                Options already set on the flash itself are
                                displayed.
                                Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                choose an item, and then adjust the setting
                                by pressing the qr buttons.
                                Available settings vary depending on the
                                shooting mode and the flash attached
                                (p. 200).



194
Using Optional Accessories


     • Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a Speedlite EX series
       flash is attached, because that setting screen is no longer accessible.
     • You can also access the setting screen by pressing the r button for at least one
       second.
     • Flash settings in      shooting mode can be configured just as they are in G
       mode.
     • 580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the external flash has been set
       up for stroboscopic flash.
     • 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie recording or
       in Movie mode. In this case, the       icon is shown.

                                                     Still Images           Movies
  Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
                                    Using the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
                                    can help prevent unnatural shadows next to
                                    subjects during vertical shooting.
                                    To keep the LCD screen out of the way of the




                                        PY
                                    bracket, use the screen closed and facing
                                    outward.


  Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX

                               C      O
This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.
Requires Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 (sold separately) for attachment to the
                                                                          Still Images




camera.

                                    Remove the ring.
                                    Make sure the camera is off.
                                    Hold down the ring release button ( ) and
                                    turn the ring in the direction of the arrow ( ).

                                    Align the mark on the ring with the mark
                                    on the camera, and then lift the ring off.




                                                                                     195
Using Optional Accessories


                             Attach the macrolite adapter.
                             Align the mark on the macrolite adapter
                             with the mark on the camera, and then turn
                             the adapter in the direction of the arrows until
                             it locks in place.
                             To remove the adapter, hold down the ring
                             release button and turn the adapter in the
                             opposite direction.
                             Attach the controller to the camera.
                             Attach the control component of the macro
                             ring lite to the hot shoe on top of the camera.




                                    PY
                             Attach the flash unit to the
                             macrolite adapter.



                             C    O
                             Press the release buttons on both sides of
                             the macro ring lite and attach the macro ring
                             lite to the macrolite adapter.


                             Choose shooting mode G, M,
                             B, or D.
                             Flash settings can only be configured in
                             these modes. In other modes, the flash is
                             adjusted and fired automatically, as needed.

                             Set the white balance to h (p. 100).

                             Enter e mode (p. 105).




196
Using Optional Accessories


                               Set [ND Filter] to [On] (p. 99).

                               Configure the external flash.
                               Follow step 5 on p. 194 to adjust the settings.

     • Keep cords (from the macro ring lite) away from flash heads.
     • When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent them
       from coming into contact with the flash heads.
     • Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot be
       used with these accessories attached.

  Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX
This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography.
Requires Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1, Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3, and
Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the camera.




                                   PY
                               Remove the ring and attach the


                                 O
                               macrolite adapter.


                          C
                               Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 195 to remove the
                               ring, and then attach the macrolite adapter.
                               Attach the off-camera shoe cord to
                               the bracket.
                               Slide the bracket screw to the outer end of the
                               bracket. Align the bracket screw with the
                               tripod socket of the off-camera shoe cord,
                               and then tighten the screw to secure it.




                                                                         197
Using Optional Accessories


                             Attach the bracket to the camera.
                             Slide the other bracket screw to the outer end
                             of the bracket. Align the bracket screw with
                             the tripod socket on the bottom of the
                             camera, and then tighten the screw to secure
                             it.




                             Attach the off-camera shoe cord to
                             the camera.
                             Attach the camera connection component of
                             the off-camera shoe cord to the hot shoe on
                             top of the camera.




                                  O PY
                             Attach the controller to the off-
                             camera shoe cord.


                             C
                             Attach the controller for the Macro Twin Lite
                             to the flash connection component of the
                             off-camera shoe cord.

                             Attach the flash unit to the
                             macrolite adapter.
                             Attach each flash head to the respective mount
                             ( ). Press the release button on the top of the
                             ring in and attach the ring to the macrolite
                             adapter ( ).




198
Using Optional Accessories


                          Configure the external flash and
                          settings on the camera.
                          Follow steps 5 – 9 on p. 196 to configure the
                          settings.

• Keep cords (from the macro twin lite and off-camera shoe cord) away
  from flash heads.
• When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent them
  from coming into contact with the flash heads or the bracket.
• Depending on the position where you have attached the flash
  controller, it may come into contact with the LCD monitor. To prevent
  this, adjust the position of attachment or the orientation of the
  controller, adjust the angle of the screen, or use the screen closed
  and facing outward.
• Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot be




                              PY
  used with these accessories attached.




                      C     O



                                                                    199
Using Optional Accessories


                                                                          Still Images
   Camera Settings Available with an External Flash (Sold
   Separately)
The following settings are available in G, M, B, or D mode. In other
shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can be
configured. (The flash is adjusted and fired automatically, as needed.)
                                                                      Shooting Mode
           Item                          Options
                                                                  G     M     B          D

                          Auto*1                                                         —
Flash Mode
                          Manual*2
Flash Exp. Comp*3         –3 to +3                                                       —

                          1/128*5  to 1/1
Flash Output*4
                          (in 1/3-stop increments)




                                             PY
Shutter Sync.             1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed

                          On



                                           O
Slow Synchro
                          Off                                            —               —

Wireless   Func.*6

Red-Eye Corr.

Red-Eye Lamp
                          On/Off

                          On/Off

                          On/Off
                                     C
                          On                                                             —
Safety FE*7
                          Off
Clear Flash Settings*8

*1 E-TTL mode is used for the flash.
*2 M mode is used for the flash.
   In D shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case, when the
   flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to the flash output
   level set on the camera.
*3 Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure compensation
   set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure compensation on the flash, the
   camera display will be updated (580EX II and 430EX II only).
*4 Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the flash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX, and Macro
   Twin Lite MT-24EX.

200
Using Optional Accessories

*6 For options other than On/Off, configure the setting on the flash unit itself. Not available
   with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX, or Macro Twin
   Lite MT-24EX. When this setting is set to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-
   curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
*7 Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro], [Safety
   FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] in the 3 menu on the
   camera (p. 179).

      • Flash settings in      shooting mode can be configured just as they are in G
        mode.




                                         O PY
                                 C



                                                                                         201
Still Images        Movies

    Printing Images
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On
the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders
for photo development services, and prepare or print images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the sake
of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by printer. Also
refer to the printer manual for additional information.

                                                                 Still Images

   Easy Print
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (sold separately) with the included interface cable (p. 2).

                                Make sure the camera and printer
                                are off.




                                        PY
                                Connect the camera to the printer.
                                Open the cover. Holding the smaller cable




                               C      O
                                plug in the orientation shown, insert the plug
                                fully into the camera terminal.
                                Connect the larger cable plug to the printer.
                                For other connection details, refer to the
                                printer manual.



                                Turn the printer on.

                                Turn the camera on.
                                Press the 1 button to turn the camera on.




202
Printing Images


                                       is displayed.




                               Choose an image.
                               Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose an image.

                               Print the image.
                               Press the c button.
                               Printing now begins.
                               To print other images, repeat steps 5 – 6 after




                                   PY
                               printing is finished.
                               When you are finished printing, turn the
                               camera and printer off and disconnect the




                         C       O
                               interface cable.

 • For Canon PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see p. 185.
 • RAW images cannot be printed.


                                                                   Still Images

Configuring Print Settings
                               Access the printing screen.
                               After following steps 1 – 5 on p. 202 to
                               choose an image, press the m button to
                               access the screen at left.

                               Configure the setting.
                               Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                               choose an item, and then choose an option
                               by pressing the qr buttons.



                                                                              203
Printing Images


                   Default    Matches current printer settings.
                    Date      Prints images with the date added.

                   File No.   Prints images with the file number added.

                    Both      Prints images with both the date and file number added.
                     Off      —

                   Default    Matches current printer settings.

                     Off      —
                              Uses information from the time of shooting to print under
                     On
                              optimal settings.

               Red-Eye 1      Corrects red-eye.

             No. of Copies    Choose the number of copies to print.

 Trimming            —        Specify a desired image area to print (see below).




                                           PY
   Paper
                     —        Specify the paper size, layout, and other details (p. 205).
  Settings




                                  C      O
  Cropping Images Before Printing (Trimming)
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.

                                  Choose [Trimming].
                                  After following step 1 on p. 203 to access the
                                  printing screen, choose [Trimming] and press
                                  the m button.
                                  A cropping frame is now displayed, indicating
                                  the image area to print.

                                  Adjust the cropping frame as
                                  needed.
                                  To resize the frame, move the zoom lever.
                                  To move the frame, press the opqr
                                  buttons.
                                  To rotate the frame, turn the 7 dial.
                                  When finished, press the m button.
204
Printing Images


                            Print the image.
                            On the screen in step 1, press the op
                            buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Print],
                            and then press the m button.

  • Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
    aspect ratios.
  • Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with [Date
    Stamp] selected.

Choosing Paper Size and Layout Before Printing
                            Choose [Paper Settings].
                            After following step 1 on p. 203 to access the
                            printing screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
                            press the m button.




                              O PY
                            Choose a paper size.

                        C   Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                            choose an option, and then press the m
                            button.



                            Choose a type of paper.
                            Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                            choose an option, and then press the m
                            button.




                                                                      205
Printing Images


                                  Choose a layout.
                                  Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose an option.
                                  When choosing [N-up], press the qr buttons
                                  to specify the number of images per sheet.
                                  Press the m button.

                                  Print the image.

  Available Layout Options
Default      Matches current printer settings.

Bordered     Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless   Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.




                                          PY
N-up         Choose how many images to print per sheet.

             Prints images for identification purposes.
ID Photo



                                        O
             Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of 4:3.

             Choose the print size.



                                C
Fixed Size
             Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.

  Printing ID Photos
                                  Choose [ID Photo].
                                  Following steps 1 – 4 on p. 205, choose [ID
                                  Photo] and press the m button.
                                  Choose the long and short side
                                  length.
                                  Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                  choose an item. Choose the length by
                                  pressing the qr buttons, and then press the
                                  m button.




206
Printing Images


                                   Choose the printing area.
                                   Follow step 2 on p. 204 to choose the printing
                                   area.




                                   Print the image.

                                                                           Movies

   Printing Movie Scenes
                                   Access the printing screen.
                                   Follow steps 1 – 5 on p. 202 to choose a




                                       PY
                                   movie, and then press the m button.
                                   Press the qr buttons to choose c, and then
                                   press the m button. The screen at left is




                             C       O
                                   displayed.

                                   Choose a printing method.
                                   Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                                   choose    , and then press the qr buttons to
                                   choose the printing method.

                                   Print the image.

  Movie Printing Options
Single        Prints the current scene as a still image.

              Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of
Sequence      paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed
              time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].

     • To cancel printing in progress, press the m button.
     • [ID Photo] and [Sequence] are not available with Canon PictBridge-compatible
       printer models earlier than CP720 and CP730.



                                                                                    207
Printing Images


                                                                         Still Images

   Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF)
Batch printing (p. 211) and ordering prints from a photo development service
can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory card
and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as follows. The
printing information you prepare this way will conform DPOF (Digital Print
Order Format) standards.
      • RAW images cannot be included in print orders.



  Adding Images to Print Orders via the c Button
You can add images to print orders (DPOF) after your shot or later during
playback simply by pressing the c button.




                                            PY
                                    Choose an image.
                                    Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to



                                          O
                                    choose an image.




                                   C
                                    Add the image to the print list.
                                    Press the c button.
                                    Press the op buttons to specify the number
                                    of prints. Choose [Add] by pressing the qr
                                    buttons or turning the 7 dial, and then press
                                    the m button.
                                    To remove the image from the print order,
                                    repeat steps 1 – 2 but choose [Remove] by
                                    pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7
                                    dial, and then press the m button.

      • Print orders cannot be set up while the camera is connected to a printer.




208
Printing Images


  Configuring Print Settings
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and other
settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print order.

                                   Press the n button, and then choose
                                   [Print Settings] on the 2 tab. Choose and
                                   configure settings as desired (p. 41).




                     Standard      One image is printed per sheet.
                                   Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per
  Print Type           Index
                                   sheet.




                                         PY
                       Both        Both standard and index formats are printed.
                        On         Images are printed with the shooting date.
     Date



                                       O
                        Off        —
                        On         Images are printed with the file number.



                               C
    File No.
                        Off        —
                                   All image print order settings are cleared after
  Clear DPOF            On
                                   printing.
     data
                        Off        —


     • Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the printer
       or photo development service, in some cases.
     •     may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory
       card has print settings that were configured on another camera.
       Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all
       previous settings.
     • Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date twice.

     • Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File
       No.] at the same time.
     • The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the 3
       tab, accessible by pressing the n button (p. 18).
     • Index printing is not available on some Canon PictBridge-compatible printers
       (sold separately).

                                                                                      209
Printing Images


 Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
                       Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
                       Press the n button, choose [Select
                       Images & Qty.] on the 2 tab, and then press
                       the m button.

                       Choose an image.
                       Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                       choose an image, and then press the m
                       button.
                       You can now specify the number of copies.
                       If you specify index printing for the image, it is
                       labeled with a      icon. To cancel index
                       printing for the image, press the m button




                              PY
                       again.      is no longer displayed.
                       Specify the number of prints.


                            O
                       Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                       specify the number of prints (up to 99).


                      CTo set up printing for other images and
                       specify the number of prints, repeat steps 2 –
                       3.
                       Printing quantity cannot be specified for index
                       prints. You can only choose which images to
                       print, by following step 2.
                       When finished, press the n button to
                       return to the menu screen.
 Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
                       Choose [Select Range].
                       Following step 1 above, choose [Select
                       Range] and press the m button.

                       Choose images.
                       Follow steps 2 – 3 on p. 150 to specify
                       images.


210
Printing Images


                      Configure the print settings.
                      Press the op buttons to choose [Order],
                      and then press the m button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
                      Choose [Select All Images].
                      Following step 1 on p. 210, choose [Select All
                      Images] and press the m button.

                      Configure the print settings.
                      Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                      choose [OK], and then press the m button.
Clearing All Print Orders
                      Choose [Clear All Selections].



                          PY
                      Following step 1 on p. 210, choose [Clear All
                      Selections] and press the m button.




                   C    O
                      Confirm clearing the order.
                      Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to
                      choose [OK], and then press the m button.
Printing Images Added to Print Orders (DPOF)
                      When images have been added to the print
                      list (pp. 208 – 211), the screen at left is
                      displayed after you connect the camera to a
                      PictBridge-compatible printer. Press the op
                      buttons to choose [Print now], and then
                      simply press the m button to print the
                      images in the print list.
                      Any DPOF print job that you temporarily stop
                      will be resumed from the next image.




                                                               211
Still Images           Movies

    Using an Eye-Fi Card
Before using an Eye-Fi card, always confirm that local use is permitted (p. 3).

Inserting a prepared Eye-Fi card enables automatic wireless transfer of
images to a computer or uploading to a photo-sharing website.
Images are transferred by the Eye-Fi card. Refer to the card’s user manual or
contact the manufacturer for instructions on preparing and using cards or
resolving transfer problems.

      • When using an Eye-Fi card, keep the following points in mind.
        • Cards may continue to transmit radio waves even when [Eye-Fi
          trans.] is set to [Disable] (p. 213). Remove the Eye-Fi card before
          entering hospitals, aircraft, or other areas where transmission is
          prohibited.
        • When troubleshooting image transfer issues, check the card and
          computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s user manual.
        • Poor wireless connections may cause image transfer to take a long




                                           PY
          time, and transfer may be interrupted in some cases.
        • Eye-Fi cards may become hot, due to their transfer functions.



                                         O
        • Battery power will be consumed faster than in normal use.
        • Camera operation may become sluggish. To resolve this, try setting


                                  C
          [Eye-Fi trans.] to [Disable].

Connection status of Eye-Fi cards in the camera can be checked on the
shooting screen (in regular information display mode) or playback screen (in
simple information display mode).
      (Gray)             Not connected

      (Blinking white)   Connecting

      (White)            Connected

      (Animated)         Transfer in progress

                         Interrupted

                         Error acquiring Eye-Fi card information (Restart the camera.
                         Repeated display of this icon may indicate a problem with the
                         card.)

Images labeled with a        icon have been transferred.


212
Using an Eye-Fi Card


     • Power saving (p. 36) on the camera is temporarily disabled during image
       transfer.
     • Choosing      mode will interrupt the Eye-Fi connection. Although the Eye-Fi
       connection will be restored after you choose another shooting mode or enter
       Playback mode, the camera may transfer any movies made in          mode again.


   Checking Connection Information
Check the access point SSID used by the Eye-Fi card or the connection
status, as needed.

                                  Press the n button, choose [Eye-Fi
                                  Settings] on the 3 tab, and then press the
                                  m button.
                                  Choose [Connection info], and then press the
                                  m button.
                                  The connection information screen is




                                       PY
                                  displayed.




                                     O
   Disabling Eye-Fi Transfer


                             C
Configure the setting as follows to disable Eye-Fi transfer by the card, if
necessary.

                                  Choose [Disable] in [Eye-Fi trans.].
                                  Press the n button, choose [Eye-Fi
                                  Settings] on the 3 tab, and then press the
                                  m button.
                                  Choose [Eye-Fi trans.], and then choose
                                  [Disable].


     • [Eye-Fi Settings] is not shown unless an Eye-Fi card is in the camera
       with its write-protect tab in the unlocked position. For this reason, you
       cannot change settings for an inserted Eye-Fi card if the write-protect
       tab is in the locked position.




                                                                                 213
Using an Eye-Fi Card




                           O PY
                       C



214
9
Appendix
 Helpful information when using the camera




                      O PY
                 C



                                             215
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If the
items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.

Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
• Confirm that you are using the correct type of battery, and that there is sufficient charge
  (p. 223).
• Confirm that the battery is inserted facing the correct way (p. 15).
• Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (p. 16).
• Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a
  cotton swab and reinserting the battery a few times.
The battery is depleted quickly.
• Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery a little by
  putting it in your pocket, for example, with the terminal cover on.
• If these measures do not help and the battery is still depleted soon after charging, it has
  reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery.
The lens is not retracted.




                                               PY
• Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover,
  turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (p. 16).
The battery is swollen.


                                             O
• Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery



                                     C
  swelling prevents the battery from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon Customer
  Support Help Desk.

Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (p. 187).

Shooting
Cannot shoot.
• In Playback mode (p. 20), press the shutter button halfway (p. 37).
Nothing is displayed (p. 46).
Strange display on the screen under low light (p. 39).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded
in movies.
• The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED
  lighting.




216
Troubleshooting

h flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting is
not possible (p. 47).
    is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (p. 46).
•   Set [IS mode] to [Continuous] (p. 120).
•   Raise the flash and set the flash mode to h (p. 116).
•   Increase the ISO speed (p. 95).
•   Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, set [IS
    Mode] to [Off] (p. 120).
Shots are out of focus.
• Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way down
  to shoot (p. 37).
• Make sure subjects are within focusing range (see “Specifications” in the Getting
  Started guide).
• Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (p. 65).
• Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
• Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (pp. 109, 114).
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.




                                            PY
• To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the shot
  with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button
  halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.



                                          O
Subjects in shots look too dark.
    Raise the flash and set the flash mode to h (p. 116).


                                  C
•
•   Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (p. 93).
•   Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (pp. 98, 163).
•   Use spot metering or AE lock (pp. 93, 94).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
•   Lower the flash and set the flash mode to ! (p. 45).
•   Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (p. 93).
•   Use spot metering or AE lock (pp. 93, 94).
•   Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (p. 46).
• Shoot within flash range (p. 116).
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
  level (pp. 117, 127).
• Increase the ISO speed (p. 95).
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
• Shoot within flash range (p. 116).
• Lower the flash and set the flash mode to ! (p. 45).
• Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output
  level (pp. 117, 127).
White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots.
• This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.

                                                                                          217
Troubleshooting

Shots look grainy.
• Lower the ISO speed (p. 95).
• High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (p. 70).
Subjects are affected by red-eye (p. 58).
• Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (p. 65) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp (p. 4) in flash
  shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction lamp. Also try
  increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range.
• Edit images using red-eye correction (p. 164).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
• Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (p. 172).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
• Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each
  Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Menu” (pp. 226 – 233).

Shooting Movies
Cannot shoot movies (p. 17).




                                               PY
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
• Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-speed
  recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of movies



                                             O
  on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (p. 171).
    is displayed and shooting stops automatically.


                                     C
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the
memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
• Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (p. 172).
• Lower the image quality (p. 60).
• Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (see “Specifications” in the
  Getting Started guide).
Zooming is not possible.
• Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in modes that do not support digital
  zoom.
• Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in   mode.
Subjects look distorted.
• Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
  malfunction.

Playback
Playback is not possible.
• Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or
  alter the folder structure. Refer to the Software Guide for details on folder structure and
  file names.



218
Troubleshooting

Playback stops, or audio skips.
• Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
  camera (p. 172).
• There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that
  have slow read speeds.
• When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip
  if computer performance is inadequate.

Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the transfer
speed as follows.
• Press the 1 button to enter Playback mode. Hold the n button down as you press
  the o and m buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press the qr buttons to
  choose [B], and then press the m button.

Eye-Fi Cards




                                         PY
Cannot transfer images (p. 212).




                               C       O



                                                                                    219
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
No memory card
• The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card
  facing the correct way (p. 16).
Memory card locked
• The write-protect tab of the SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card or Eye-Fi card is set to the
  locked position. Switch the write-protect tab to the unlocked position (p. 15).
Cannot record!
• Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
  memory card facing the correct way (p. 16).
Memory card error (p. 172)
• If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
  memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk
  (p. 16).
Insufficient space on card
• There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (pp. 43, 67, 91, 123) or




                                             PY
  edit images (pp. 160 – 164). Either erase unneeded images (pp. 152) or insert a
  memory card with enough free space (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide).
Change the battery pack. (p. 15)
No Image.



                                   C       O
• The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (p. 148)
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
AVI/RAW
• Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
• It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer,
  or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot register this image!/Cannot modify/
Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image.
• The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already
  edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*)
  functions are not available for movies.
  Magnify* (p. 145), Smart Shuffle* (p. 147), Categorize (p. 157), Rotate (p. 155), Edit*
  (pp. 160 – 164), Assign as Start-up Image* (p. 171), and Print Order* (p. 208).
• Grouped images cannot be processed (p. 85).
Invalid selection range
• When specifying a range for image selection (pp. 150, 153, 159, 210), you attempted
  to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.

220
On-Screen Messages


Exceeded selection limit
• More than 998 images were selected for Print Order (p. 208). Choose 998 images or
  less.
• Print Order (p. 208) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of
  selected images and try again.
• You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (p. 148), Erase (p. 152),
  Favorites (p. 157), My Category (p. 158), or Print Order (p. 208).
Communication error
• An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented printing
  or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially available
  USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer card slot.
Naming error!
• When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) has been
  reached, new folders cannot be created, and images cannot be recorded. In the 3
  menu, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (p. 173), or format the memory card
  (p. 171).




                                         PY
Lens Error
• This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used
  in dusty or sandy locations.




                                       O
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case,
  contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.



                               C
A camera error was detected (error number)
• If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have
  been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
• Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, write
  down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
File Error
• It may not be possible to print computer-edited images or images shot with another
  camera.
Print error
• Check the paper size setting. If this error message is displayed when the setting is
  correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again.
Ink absorber full
• Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber
  replacement.




                                                                                    221
On-Screen Information

  Shooting (Information Display)




                                       PY
 Battery level (p. 223)     Digital zoom                 Grid lines (p. 128)
 Camera orientation*        magnification (p. 51),       Shutter speed (pp. 124,
 White balance correction   Digital tele-converter       126)




                                     O
 (p. 101)                   (p. 107)                     Electronic level (p. 176)
 My Colors (p. 102)         Focusing range (pp. 105,     Aperture value (pp. 125,



                             C
 AEB shooting (p. 97) /     106), AF lock (p. 114), IS   126)
 Focus bracketing           mode icon (p. 49)            Exposure compensation
 (p. 115)                   Shooting mode (p. 226),      level (p. 93)
 Drive mode (p. 104)        Scene icon (p. 48)           i-Contrast (p. 98)
 Eye-Fi connection status   Flash mode (p. 116),         White balance (p. 100)
 (p. 212)                   LED light (p. 195)           Mercury lamp correction
 Metering method (p. 94)    AF frame (p. 108)            (p. 59)
 Still image compression    Red-eye correction           Camera shake warning
 (p. 58), Resolution        (p. 58)                      (p. 46)
 (p. 57)                    Flash exposure               Exposure shift bar
 Histogram (p. 138)         compensation / Flash         Zoom bar (p. 44)
 Recordable shots           output level (pp. 117,       Blink detection (p. 64)
 Self-timer (p. 52)         127)                         Exposure level (p. 126)
 Movie quality (p. 60)      Spot AE point frame          MF indicator (p. 106)
 Focal length (p. 105)      (p. 94)
                                                         Image stabilization
 Remaining time             Date stamp (p. 54)           (p. 120)
                            ISO speed (p. 95)            Time zone (p. 175)
                            ND filter (p. 99)            Wind filter (p. 61)
                            AE lock (p. 93), FE lock     Exposure compensation
                            (p. 118)                     bar (p. 93)


222
On-Screen Information

*       : Regular orientation,      : Held vertically
    The camera detects the shooting orientation and adjusts settings for optimal shots.
    Orientation is also detected during playback, and in either orientation, the camera
    automatically rotates images as needed.
    However, the orientation may not be detected correctly when the camera is pointed
    straight up or down.

     Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
                Display                                       Details

                                       Sufficient charge
                                       Slightly depleted, but sufficient

                      (Blinking red)   Nearly depleted—charge the battery soon

       [Change the battery pack.]      Depleted—charge the battery immediately




                                         O PY
                                 C



                                                                                     223
On-Screen Information



  Playback (Detailed Information Display)




 Switch display (RGB           Battery level (p. 223)       File size
 histogram) (p. 139)           Metering method (p. 94)      Still images: Resolution
 My Category (p. 158)          Folder number - File         Movies: Movie length




                                          PY
 Exposure compensation         number (p. 173)              Compression (image
 level (p. 93), Exposure       Current image no. / Total    quality) (p. 58) /
 shift level (p. 88)           no. of images                Resolution (p. 57), RAW



                                        O
 ND filter (p. 99)             Shutter speed (still         (p. 119), MOV (movies)




                                 C
 White balance (p. 100),       images) (p. 124), Image      Group playback (p. 144),
 White balance correction      quality / Frame rate         Image editing (pp. 160 –
 (p. 101), Mercury lamp        (movies) (p. 60)             164)
 correction (p. 59)            Aperture value (pp. 125,     Protection (p. 148)
 Histogram (p. 138)            126)                         Favorite (p. 157)
 Print order (p. 208)          i-Contrast (pp. 98, 163)     My Colors (pp. 102, 162)
 ISO speed (p. 95),            Flash (p. 116), Flash        Red-eye correction
 Playback speed (p. 75)        exposure compensation        (pp. 58, 164)
 Shooting mode (p. 226)        (p. 117)                     Shooting date/time
 Transferred via Eye-Fi        Focusing range (pp. 105,     (p. 18)
 (p. 212)                      106)                         Movie (pp. 44, 136)
                                                            High-speed burst HQ
                                                            (p. 85)

      • Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (p. 186).




224
On-Screen Information


   Summary of Movie Control Panel in “Viewing” (p. 136)
          Exit

          Play
          Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the qr buttons or turn the 7
          dial. No sound is played.)

          Skip Backward* (To continue skipping backward, keep holding down the m
          button.)
          Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the m button.)

          Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the m button.)

          Skip Forward* (To continue skipping forward, keep holding down the m
          button.)

   *      Edit (p. 165)




                                         PY
          Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer
   c      (p. 202).




                                       O
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.




                               C
       • To skip forward or back during movie playback, press the qr buttons.




                                                                                  225
Functions and Menu Tables

    Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
                                    Shooting Mode                                                    K
                                                                     D BM G A
                                                                                                    I J V
 Function
Exposure Compensation (p. 93)                              *1   *1   —                    —
                                                           *1   *1   —
ISO Speed (p. 95)
                                       –                   *1   *1                        —      —       — —
White Balance Correction (p. 101)                          *1   *1                        —    — —       — —
                                                           *1   *1   —    —    —
                                   h                       *1   *1                        —
Flash (p. 116)*3
                                   Z                       *1   *1   —         —          *4        —    *5   —
                                   !                       *1   *1
                                                           *1   *1
Metering Method (p. 94)
                                                           *1   *1                        —         —    — —
Shutter Speed (p. 124)                                     *1   *1        —         —     —    — —       — —
Aperture Value (p. 125)                                    *1   *1             —    —     —    — —       — —




                                                        PY
Program Shift (p. 93)                                                —                    —      —       — —
AE Lock (p. 93)/FE Lock (p. 118)                                     —                    —         —    — —
AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (p. 88)               —          — —       —    —    —     —    — —       — —




                                                      O
AF Lock (when registered to the     button) (p. 131)                                      —                —




                                            C
                                                           *1   *1
Focusing Range (pp. 105, 106) e                            *1   *1                        —                   —
                                       /AF Lock            *1   *1                        —                   —
Change AF Frame Position (p. 110)                          *1   *1                        —    — —       — —
Change AF Frame Size (p. 110)                              *1   *1                        —
Face Select (p. 113)
Tracking AF (pp. 55, 111)                                                                      —
                                   Off                     *1   *1                             —
Screen Display (p. 39)             Display 1               *1   *1
                                   Display 2               *1   *1

                                                FUNC. Menu
                                                           *1   *1                        —
DR Correction (p. 98)                                      *1   *1   —                         — —       —    —
                                                           *1   *1                        —    — —       — —
                                                           *1   *1                        —
Shadow Correct (p. 99)
                                                           *1   *1                                  —    — —
*1 The available settings depend on the registered shooting modes. *2 Detailed settings not available.
*3 Fixed to ! when the flash is lowered, but selectable when the flash is raised.




226
Functions and Menu Tables




                          K                                                                               E
                                                      x                                            T
                              w S O P t                                                                 E
                                                      v                                            Y
                                                            —                                 — —       —    —

—    —    —    — —       —    —    —    —    —    — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
— —       —    — —       — —       *2   —    —    — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          — —
—                —       —                        — — —                                                 — —
—                   —    —                        —         —                                           —    —
—    —    —    — —       —    —    —    — —       —         —    — — —         — —       — — —          —    —



— —       — — —          — —       — — —          — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
— —       — — —          — —       — — —          — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—    —    —    —    —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —




                                                   PY
—    —    —    —    —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—    —    —    —    —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—    —    —    —    —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —




                                                 O
—    —    —    —                                  —




                                        C
—    —    —    —                                  —
—    —    —    —                                  — —
—    —    —    —    —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—    —    —    —         —                        — — —              — —
—                        —                        — —                — —
     —    — —            —                        — — —            — —         —                        — —
—    —    — —            —                          — —          — — —         — —       — — —          — —


     —    —    —                                            —             —                        —

                                                 FUNC. Menu
                                   —                                                                    —    —
— —       — — —          — —            — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
— —       — — —          — —       —    — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
                                                                                                        —    —
—    —    —    —    —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
*4 Not available, but switches to Z in some cases. *5 Not available, but switches to Z when the flash fires.
                                                             Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable.




                                                                                                          227
Functions and Menu Tables


                                      Shooting Mode                                                       K
                                                                        D BM G A
                                                                                                         I J V
 Function
                                                              *1   *1
                                                              *1   *1                         —          —    — —
White Balance (p. 100)               h                        *1   *1                         —          —    — —
                                     S                        *1   *1                         —          —    — —
                                              *2              *1   *1                         —          —    — —
                                                              *1   *1

                                                   *3
My Colors (p. 102)                       *3                   *1   *1                         —          —    — —
                                                        *4

                                                              *1   *1

Bracketing (pp. 115, 97)                                      *1   *1   —                     —     — —       — —
                                                              *1   *1                         —     — —       — —
                                                              *1   *1

Drive Mode (p. 104)                  W                        *1   *1                         —     —




                                                               PY
                                         *5                   *1   *1                         —     —
                                                              *1   *1

                                     ]                        *1   *1




                                                             O
Self-Timer (p. 52)
                                     [                        *1   *1




                                                   C
                                    $                         *1   *1

                                    Delay*6                   *1   *1
Self-Timer Settings (p. 53)
                                    Shots*7                   *1   *1                               —
Flash Exposure Compensation (p. 117)                          *1   *1   —                     —       —       — —
Flash Output Level (p. 127)                                   *1   *1                    —    —     — —       — —
                                                              *1   *1                         —          —    — —
ND Filter (p. 99)
                                                              *1   *1


Still Image Aspect Ratio (p. 56)                              *1   *1                               —

Image Type (p. 119)                                           *1   *1                         —     — —       — —
                                                              *1   *1
Resolution (p. 57)                                            *1   *1

Compression (p. 58)                                           *1   *1
                                                              *1   *1

Movie Quality (p. 60)                                         *1   *1
                                                              *1   *1

*1 The available settings depend on the registered shooting modes. *2 Not available in x or v.
*3 White balance is not available. *4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone. *5     is set with    , AF lock, or t.




228
Functions and Menu Tables


                          K                                                                                  E
                                                        x                                            T
                              w S O P t                                                                   E
                                                        v                                            Y

—                    —    —    —    —    —    —    —         —    — — —           — —      — — —
—                    —    —    —    —    —    —    —         —    — — —           — —      — — —           —    —
—                    —    —    —    —    —    —    —         —    — — —           — —      — — —
—                    —    —    —         —    —    —         —    — — —           — —      — — —



—                    —    —    —    —    —    —    —         —    — — —           — —      — — —



—    —    —    —     —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —           — —      — — —           —    —
—    —    —    —     —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —           — —      — — —           —    —
                     —
—    —    —    —          —                             — —                                                —    —




                                                    PY
     —    —    —     —    —                             — —                                                —    —

—    —    —    —     —




                                                  O
—    —    —    —     —




                                        C
—    —    —    —     —
—    —    —    —     —
—    —    —    —     —                                  —                                                  —    —
—    —    —    —     —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —           — —      — — —           —    —
—    —    —    —     —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —           — —      — — —           —    —
—    —    —    —     —    —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —           — —      — — —


                     —    —                             —         — —        *8   —                        —    —

—    —    —    — —        —    —    —    — —       — — —          — — —           — —      — — —           —    —

                     —    —                                  —    — — —           — —      — — —

                                                                            —                                   —
                                                                             *9
                                                                             *9                                 —
*6 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots. *7 One shot (cannot be modified)
in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*8 Only    and       are available. *9 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (p. 56).
                                                               Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable.




                                                                                                             229
Functions and Menu Tables


 4 Shooting Menu
                                   Shooting Mode                                     K
                                                                D BM G A
                                                                                     I J V
 Function
                             Face AiAF                *1   *1

AF Frame (p. 108)            Tracking AF              *1   *1               *2   —
                             FlexiZone/Center*2       *1   *1               —
                             Standard                 *1   *1

                             Off                      *1   *1
Digital Zoom (pp. 51, 107)
                             Digital Tele-converter   *1   *1               —    — —     — —
                             1.5x/1.9x
                             On                       *1   *1                    —         —
AF-Point Zoom (p. 63)                                 *1   *1
                             Off
                             On                       *1   *1               —    —
Servo AF (p. 112)
                             Off*4                    *1   *1                             —




                                                    PY
                             On                       *1   *1                             —
Continuous AF (p. 113)                                *1   *1
                             Off                                            —    —
                             On                       *1   *1
AF-assist Beam (p. 65)




                                                  O
                             Off                      *1   *1

                             On                       *1   *1               —    —         —
MF-Point Zoom (p. 106)




                                         C
                             Off                      *1   *1

                             On                       *1   *1               —              —
Safety MF (p. 106)                                    *1   *1
                             Off
                                        Auto          *1   *1   —
                             Flash
                             Mode       Manual        *1   *1           —   —    — —     — —

                             Flash Exp. Comp          *1   *1   —           —        —   — —
                             Flash Output             *1   *1           —   —    — —     — —
                                                      *1   *1
                             Shutter 1st-curtain
Flash Control (pp. 58, 65,   Sync.                    *1   *1
                                       2nd-curtain                          —        —   — —
117, 118, 127)
                                                      *1   *1
                             Red-Eye On
                             Corr.   Off              *1   *1
                                                      *1   *1
                             Red-Eye On
                             Lamp    Off              *1   *1

                                     On               *1   *1   —
                             Safety
                             FE      Off              *1   *1               —        —   — —
                             Max ISO Speed            *1   *1   —           —        —   — —
ISO Auto Settings (p. 95)                             *1   *1
                             Rate of Change                     —   —       —        —   — —
High ISO NR (p. 96)          Low / Standard / High    *1   *1               —    — —     — —




230
Functions and Menu Tables




                    K                                                                        E
                                            x                                         T
                        w S O P t                                                         E
                                            v                                         Y
—                                       — —             — —
    —   —   —       —                   — — —           — —       —                        —    —
    —   —   —       —                           —            —
                —   —                       — —     — — —         — —       — — —


—   —   —   — —     —   —   —   — —     — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —

—                   —                   — —             — —       —                        —    —

    —   —   — —     —                   — — —           — —       —                        —    —
—




                                          PY
                                        —
—   —   —   — —                                                                            —    —
—                                       —




                                        O
    —
—   —   —   —       —                   — —             — —       —                        —    —

—


—

—
    —




    —
        —




        —
            —




            — —
                —   —

                    —   —   —
                                C
                                —   —
                                        — —


                                        —

                                        — — —
                                                —

                                                    — — —         — —       — — —
                                                                                           —

                                                                                           —
                                                                                                —

                                                                                                —

—   —   —   — —     —   —   —   —   —   — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—   —   —   — —     —   —   —   —   —   — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—               —   —                   —       —                                          —    —
—   —   —   —   —   —   —   —   —   —   — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—               —   —                   — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—               —   —                   —   —                                              —    —
—               —   —                   —       —                                          —    —
—               —   —                   —       —                                          — —
—               —   —                   —       —                                          — —
—   —   —   — —     —   —   —   — —     — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—   —   —   — —     —   —   —   — —     — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—   —   —   — —     —   —   —   — —     — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
—   —   —   — —     —   —   —   — —     — — —       — — —         — —       — — —          —    —
                                                Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable.




                                                                                             231
Functions and Menu Tables




                                     Shooting Mode                                                K
                                                                    D BM G A
                                                                                                  I J V
 Function
Hg Lamp Corr. (p. 59)          On/Off*                   —     — —      —     —    —         — —       — —
                               Center                     *1   *1                       —      —       — —
Spot AE Point (p. 94)                                     *1   *1
                               AF Point                                                 —    — —       — —
                               On                         *1   *1   —              —    —    — —       — —
Safety Shift (p. 125)
                               Off                        *1   *1

                               On                         *1   *1
Wind Filter (p. 61)
                               Off                        *1   *1

                               Off                        *1   *1

                               2 sec.                     *1   *1
Review (p. 66)
                               3 – 10 sec.                *1   *1

                               Hold                       *1   *1




                                                       PY
                               Off                        *1   *1

Review Info (p. 66)            Detailed                   *1   *1

                               Focus Check                *1   *1




                                                     O
                               On                         *1   *1
Blink Detection (p. 64)                                   *1   *1
                               Off




                                             C
                               Shooting Info              *1   *1

                               Grid Lines                 *1   *1
Custom Display (p. 128)                                   *1   *1
                               Electronic Level
                               Histogram                  *1   *1

                               On                         *1   *1
Reverse Disp. (p. 17)                                     *1   *1
                               Off
                                       Off                *1   *1

                               IS Mode Continuous         *1   *1

IS Settings (p. 120)                       Shoot Only     *1   *1                       —
                                                          *1   *1
                               Powered On
                               IS      Off                *1   *1

                               Off                        *1   *1

Date Stamp (p. 54)             Date                       *1   *1

                               Date & Time                *1   *1

Set z7 Func. (p. 129)                                     *1   *1                       —    — —       — —
Set Shortcut button (p. 131)                              *1   *1

Save Settings (p. 132)                                                                  —    — —       — —
*1 The available settings depend on the registered shooting modes. *2 Only available by pressing the o button
(p. 108).
*3 [FlexiZone] in G, M, B and D modes, and [Center] in all other modes.




232
Functions and Menu Tables




                       K                                                                            E
                                                x                                            T
                          w S O P t                                                              E
                                                v                                            Y
—    —   —   — —      —    —   —   —    —   — — —         — — —          — —       — — —          —    —
—    —   —   — —      —    —   —   —    —   — — —         — — —          — —       — — —          —    —
—    —   —   — —      —    —   —   —    —   — — —         — — —          — —       — — —          —    —
—    —   —   — —      —    —   —   —    —   — — —         — — —          — —       — — —          —    —

                                                                    —
                                                                    —
                                                                                                  —    —
                                                                                                  —    —
                                                                                                  —    —
                                                                                                  —    —




                                              PY
                                                                                                  —    —
                                                 —                                                —    —
                                              —                                                   —    —




                                            O
—                 —   —        —            — — —              — —       — —                      —    —




                                   C             —


                      —

                      —                                                                           —    —


                      —


                  —   —                          — —      — — —          — —       — — —          —    —
                  —   —                          — —      — — —          — —       — — —          —    —
—    —   —   — —      —    —   —   — —      — — —         — — —          — —       — — —          —    —

—    —   —   — —      —    —   —   — —      — — —         — — —          — —       — — —          —    —
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected in A mode.
                                                       Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable.




                                                                                                    233
Functions and Menu Tables



   3 Set up Menu
           Item            Ref. Page                 Item             Ref. Page
Mute                         p. 168      Time Zone                     p. 175
Volume                       p. 168      Date/Time                      p. 19
Sound Options                p. 169      Distance Units                p. 176
Hints & Tips                 p. 169      Electronic Level              p. 176
LCD Brightness               p. 170      Video System                  p. 187
Start-up Image               p. 170      Ctrl via HDMI                 p. 188
Format                    pp. 171, 172   Eye-Fi Settings               p. 212
File Numbering               p. 173      Copyright Info                p. 177
Create Folder                p. 173      Language                       p. 20




                                           PY
Lens Retract                 p. 174      Reset All                     p. 179
Power Saving              pp. 36, 174


         My Menu Menu
                   Item
                               C         O                Ref. Page
My Menu settings                                            p. 133




234
Functions and Menu Tables



   1 Playback Menu
             Item       Ref. Page                Item           Ref. Page
Movie Digest Playback    p. 143     Red-Eye Correction            p. 164
Smart Shuffle            p. 147     Trimming                      p. 161
Slideshow                p. 146     Resize                        p. 160
Erase                    p. 152     My Colors                     p. 162
Protect                  p. 148     Scroll Display                p. 137
Rotate                   p. 155     Group Images                  p. 144
Favorites                p. 157     Auto Rotate                   p. 155
My Category              p. 158     Resume                        p. 137
i-Contrast               p. 163     Transition                    p. 137




                                    PY
   2 Print Menu


Print
             Item


Select Images & Qty.
                        Ref. Page



                        C  —
                         p. 210
                                  O              Item
                                    Select All Images
                                    Clear All Selections
                                                                Ref. Page
                                                                  p. 211
                                                                  p. 211
Select Range             p. 210     Print Settings                p. 209




                                                                       235
Handling Precautions
• The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
  subjecting it to strong impact.
• Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
  generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or
  erase image data.
• If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry
  soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force.
• Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or
  screen.
• Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
  contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
• To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
  temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm
  environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and let
  it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag.
• If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.




                                       PY
  Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the
  battery and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated
  before resuming use.




                               C     O



236
Index
                               A                                     DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk ................ 2
AC adapter kit.......................................... 189         Digital tele-converter................................ 107
Accessories ............................................. 182        Digital zoom...............................................51
AEB mode ................................................. 97        Display language .......................................20
AE lock ...................................................... 93    DPOF....................................................... 208
AF frames ............................ 22, 45, 108, 110              Drive mode .............................................. 104
AF Focusing                                                          Dynamic Range Correction .......................98
AF lock..................................................... 114
Aspect ratio................................................ 56                                    E
AUTO mode (shooting mode)........ 21, 39, 44                         Editing
Av (shooting mode) ................................. 125                  Cropping ...........................................161
AV cable .................................................. 186           i-Contrast .......................................... 163
                                                                          My Colors.......................................... 162
                               B                                          Red-eye correction ........................... 164
Battery                                                                   Resizing images ............................... 160
    Charging ............................................. 14        Erasing ....................................................152
    Level ................................................. 223      Erasing all................................................152
    Power saving ...................................... 36           Error messages .......................................220




                                                               PY
Black and white images..................... 73, 102                  Exposure
Blink detection ........................................... 64            AE lock................................................93
                                                                          Compensation.....................................93
                               C                                          FE lock.............................................. 118



                                                             O
C1/C2 (shooting mode) ........................... 132                Eye-Fi cards ........................................2, 212




                                                 C
Camera
    Reset all............................................ 179                                      F
Camera shake ......................................... 120           Face AiAF (AF frame mode)....................108
Clock.......................................................... 42   Face select .............................................. 113
Color (white balance)............................... 100             Face self-timer (shooting mode)................84
Color Accent (shooting mode) ................... 78                  Favorites.................................................. 157
Color Swap (shooting mode) ..................... 79                  FE lock.....................................................118
Compression ratio (image quality)............. 58                    File numbering......................................... 173
Continuous shooting................................ 104              Fireworks (shooting mode) ........................70
    High-speed burst HQ                                              Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) ................74
    (shooting mode).................................. 85             Flash
Creative filters (shooting mode)................. 71                      Flash exposure compensation..........117
Cropping .................................................. 161           On .....................................................116
Custom white balance ............................. 101                    Slow synchro .................................... 116
                                                                     FlexiZone (AF frame mode)..................... 109
                               D                                     Focus bracketing ..................................... 115
Date/time                                                            Focus check ............................................139
    Adding date/time to images ................ 54                   Focusing
    Changing ............................................ 19              AF frames ......................................... 108
    Setting ................................................ 18           AF lock.............................................. 114
    World clock ....................................... 175               AF-point zoom ....................................63
Defaults Reset all                                                        Face select .......................................113

                                                                                                                            237
Index

   Servo AF........................................... 112              Image quality (resolution/frame rate).. 60
Focusing range                                                      Multi-area White Balance .......................... 59
   Macro................................................ 105        My Category ............................................ 158
   Manual focus .................................... 106            My Colors ........................................ 102, 162
Focus lock ............................................... 109
FUNC. menu                                                                                         N
   Basic operations ................................. 40            ND filter ..................................................... 99
                                                                    Nostalgic (shooting mode)......................... 73
                              H
Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)...... 69                                                       P
High dynamic range (shooting mode) ....... 72                       P (shooting mode) ..................................... 92
High-speed burst HQ (shooting mode)...... 85                        Package Contents ....................................... 2
Household power .................................... 189            PictBridge ........................................ 185, 202
                                                                    Playback Viewing
                               I                                    Portrait (shooting mode)............................ 68
i-Contrast........................................... 98, 163       Poster effect (shooting mode) ................... 71
Image quality Compression ratio                                     Powered IS.............................................. 121
Images                                                              Power Battery, AC adapter kit
     Display period..................................... 66         Power saving............................................. 36




                                                                      PY
     Erasing ............................................. 152      Printing .................................................... 202
     Playback Viewing                                               Program AE............................................... 92
     Protecting ......................................... 148       Protecting ................................................ 148



                                                                    O
Indicator..................................................... 42
                                                                                                   R


                                                      C
Interface cable............................... 2, 29, 202
ISO speed ................................................. 95      RAW ........................................................ 119
                                                                    Red-eye correction ............................ 58, 164
                               L                                    Reset all .................................................. 179
Lamp ......................................................... 65   Resizing images ...................................... 160
Language display ...................................... 20          Resolution (image size)............................. 57
                                                                    Rotating ................................................... 155
                              M
M (shooting mode) .................................. 126                                           S
Macro (focus mode) ................................ 105             Screen
Magnified display..................................... 145               Icons ......................................... 222, 224
Manual focus (focus mode) ..................... 106                      Language display ............................... 20
Memory cards.............................................. 2             Menu FUNC. menu, Menu
Menu                                                                SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards Memory
    Basic operations ................................. 41           cards
    Table................................................. 226      Self-timer ................................................... 52
Metering method ....................................... 94               2-second self-timer ............................. 53
Miniature effect (shooting mode)............... 74                       Customizing the self-timer .................. 53
Monochrome (shooting mode) .................. 77                         Face self-timer (shooting mode)......... 84
Movie Digest (shooting mode)................... 81                       Wink self-timer (shooting mode)......... 83
Movies                                                              Sepia tone images............................. 73, 102
    Editing............................................... 165      Servo AF ................................................. 112

238
Index

Shadow Correct......................................... 99        World clock .............................................. 175
Shooting
     Shooting date/time Date/time                                                              Z
     Shooting information................. 128, 222               Zoom ............................................. 21, 44, 51
Slideshow ................................................ 146
Smart Shuffle........................................... 147
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) ................. 82
Smile (shooting mode)............................... 82
Snow (shooting mode)............................... 70
Software
     DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk ......... 2
     Installation........................................... 28
Sounds .................................................... 168
Sports (shooting mode) ............................. 69
Stereo AV cable....................................... 186
Stitch Assist (shooting mode) .................... 87
Super vivid (shooting mode)...................... 71

                              T



                                                            PY
Terminal..................... 29, 186, 187, 189, 202
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)........... 76
Tracking AF ....................................... 55, 111



                                                          O
Traveling with the camera ............... 175, 182




                                               C
Troubleshooting....................................... 216
Tv (shooting mode).................................. 124
TV display................................................ 186

                             U
Underwater (shooting mode) ..................... 69

                              V
Viewfinder.................................................. 38
Viewing
    Filtered playback............................... 141
    Index display..................................... 141
    Magnified display .............................. 145
    Single-image display........................... 24
    Slideshow ......................................... 146
    Smart Shuffle .................................... 147
    TV display ......................................... 186

                             W
White balance (color)............................... 100
Widescreen (resolution)............................. 57
Wink self-timer (shooting mode)................ 83

                                                                                                                        239
FCC Notice
(Digital Camera, Model PC1674 systems)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions;
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B
digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.




                                             PY
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
  receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.




                                           O
The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used with this
equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC



                                   C
rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified
in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required
to stop operation of the equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
Tel No. (516) 328-5600

Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
To ensure proper operation of this product, use of genuine Canon
accessories is recommended.

                 USA and Canada only:
                 The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is
                 recyclable.
                 Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
                 recycle this battery.


240
For CA, USA only
 Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling
 may apply.
 See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.

Battery Charger CB-2LC
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE
THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug
adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.

Battery Charger CB-2LCE



                                      PY
The adapter can be used with a power supply between 100 and 240 V AC.
Contact your Canon dealer for information about plug adapter for overseas
use.



                                    O
For U.S.A. customers only: For areas where 120 V AC power is not used,
you will need a special plug adapter.


                             C
For only United States
Use a UL listed, 1.8-3m(6-10ft), Type SPT-2 or NTSPT-2, AWG no.18
power supply cord, rated for 125V 7A, with a non-polarized NEMA 1-15P
plug rated for 125V 15A.

Trademark Acknowledgments
• The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
  trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
• The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple INC.

About MPEG-4 Licensing
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and
may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T
patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
* Notice displayed in English as required.
                                                                         241
Disclaimer
• Reprinting, transmitting, or storing in a retrieval system any part of this
  guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited.
• Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any
  time without prior notice.




                                       PY
• Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
  actual equipment.
• The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for


                                     O
  damages due to mistaken operation of the products.



                              C


CDD-E451-020                                            © CANON INC. 2012

Canon power shot g1x

  • 1.
    Camera User Guide O PY • Before use, be sure to read this guide, including the safety precautions. C • This guide will familiarize you with how to use the camera correctly. • Keep the guide handy for future reference. ENGLISH
  • 2.
    Package Contents Before use,make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is missing, contact your camera dealer. Camera Battery Pack NB-10L Battery Charger (with terminal cover) CB-2LC/CB-2LCE Interface Cable Neck Strap Lens Cap IFC-400PCU NS-DC9 (with cord) PY Getting Started DIGITAL CAMERA Warranty Card Solution Disk • A memory card is not included (see below). PDF Manuals C O For information about the included software, refer to the Software Guide, in PDF format (p. 26). • Adobe Reader is required to view the PDF manuals. Compatible Memory Cards The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of capacity. • SD memory cards* • SDHC memory cards* • SDXC memory cards* • Eye-Fi cards * Conforms to SD specifications. However, not all memory cards have been verified to work with the camera. 2
  • 3.
    Preliminary Notes andLegal Information About Eye-Fi Cards This product is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions (including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that an approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in the area, please check with the card manufacturer. • Always confirm beforehand that memory cards are supported on other devices such as card readers and computers (including the current version of your operating system). Preliminary Notes and Legal Information • Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and PY affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory cards, that results in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be O recorded in a way that is machine readable. C • Images recorded by the camera are intended for personal use. Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial settings. • The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. • Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images. • The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before using the camera. • When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm. This does not indicate damage. 3
  • 4.
    Part Names andConventions in This Guide Front dial Mode dial Lamp Exposure compensation dial Lens Hot shoe Zoom lever (Pop up flash) switch PY Shooting: i (telephoto) / Flash j (wide angle) Speaker Playback: k (magnify) / g (index) Ring release button O Strap mount DC coupler cable port C Shutter button Memory card/battery cover Power button/lamp Tripod socket • In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble. • The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons. z Front dial on front o Up button on back q Left button on back 7 Control dial on back m FUNC./SET button on back r Right button on back p Down button on back • On-screen text is indicated in brackets. • : Important information you should know • : Notes and tips for expert camera use • (p. xx): Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a page number) • Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings. 4
  • 5.
    Part Names andConventions in This Guide (Shortcut) / c (Direct print) button Remote terminal + (AE lock/FE lock) / d (Jump) button HDMITM terminal (AF Frame Selector) / n button a (Single image erase) button (Metering) button PY Screen (LCD monitor) ISO speed / Up button Diopter adjustment dial e (Macro) / f (Manual focus) / Viewfinder Left button O Microphone Control dial Indicator FUNC./SET button C 1 (Playback) button h (Flash) / Right button Movie button l (Display) / Down button AV OUT (Audio/video output) / DIGITAL terminal Turning the control dial is one way to choose setting items, switch images, and perform other operations. Most of these operations are also possible with the opqr buttons. • For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as “the memory card” . • The tabs shown above titles indicate whether the function is used for still images, movies, or both. Still Images : Indicates that the function is used when shooting or viewing still images. Movies : Indicates that the function is used when shooting or viewing movies. 5
  • 6.
    Contents Package Contents .............................2 Special Modes for Other Compatible Memory Cards ................2 Purposes....................................... 81 Preliminary Notes and Legal Shooting Various Movies ................ 88 Information.......................................3 Part Names and Conventions in 4 G mode .............................91 This Guide .......................................4 Shooting in Program AE Mode Contents ............................................6 (G Mode) ...................................... 92 Contents: Basic Operations ...............8 Image Brightness (Exposure Safety Precautions...........................10 Compensation).............................. 93 Initial Preparations ...........................13 Color and Continuous Shooting .... 100 Trying the Camera Out ....................21 Shooting Range and Focusing...... 105 Included Software, PDF Manuals ....26 Flash ............................................. 116 Accessories .....................................32 Shooting RAW Images.................. 119 Other Settings ............................... 120 1 Camera Basics .................35 5 Tv, Av, M, C1, C2 Mode..123 PY On/Off ..............................................36 Shutter Button..................................37 Specific Shutter Speeds Optical Viewfinder............................38 (Tv Mode).................................... 124 Shooting Modes...............................39 Shooting Display Options ................39 C FUNC. Menu....................................40 n Menu ....................................41 O Specific Aperture Values (Av Mode) ................................... 125 Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values (M Mode).......... 126 Indicator Display ..............................42 Customization for Shooting Clock................................................42 Styles .......................................... 128 2 Smart Auto Mode .............43 6 Playback Mode ...............135 Shooting in Smart Auto Mode..........44 Viewing.......................................... 136 Common, Convenient Features.......51 Browsing and Filtering Images...... 141 Image Customization Features........56 Image Viewing Options ................. 145 Helpful Shooting Features ...............62 Protecting Images ......................... 148 Customizing Camera Operation ......65 Erasing Images ............................. 152 Rotating Images ............................ 155 Image Categories.......................... 157 3 Other Shooting Modes.....67 Editing Still Images........................ 160 Specific Scenes ...............................68 Editing Movies............................... 165 Image Effects (Creative Filters) .......71 6
  • 7.
    Contents Printing Images ............................. 202 7 Setting Menu ..................167 Using an Eye-Fi Card .................... 212 Adjusting Basic Camera Functions .................................... 168 9 Appendix.........................215 8 Accessories....................181 Troubleshooting............................. 216 On-Screen Messages.................... 220 Tips on Using Included On-Screen Information .................. 222 Accessories ................................ 182 Functions and Menu Tables .......... 226 Optional Accessories .................... 182 Handling Precautions .................... 236 Using Optional Accessories .......... 186 Index.............................................. 237 O PY C 7
  • 8.
    Contents: Basic Operations 4Shoot Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode) ............................. 44 Shooting people well I Portraits V Kids and Pets w At the Beach P Against Snow (p. 68) (p. 68) (p. 69) (p. 70) Matching specific scenes J Landscape Sports Night Scenes (p. 68) (p. 69) (p. 69) PY S Under Water O t Fireworks O Foliage (p. 69) (p. 70) (p. 70) Applying special effects Vivid Colors C Poster Effect “Aged” Photos Fish-Eye Effect (p. 71) (p. 71) (p. 73) (p. 74) Miniature Effect Toy Camera Effect Monochrome (p. 74) (p. 76) (p. 77) Focus on faces ....................................................... 44, 68, 108, 113 Without using the flash (Flash Off) ......................................... 22, 45 With myself in the shot (Self-Timer)........................................ 52, 84 Add the shooting date and time (Date Stamp).............................. 54 Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)........................... 81 8
  • 9.
    Contents: Basic Operations 1View View images (Playback Mode) ................................................... 136 Automatic playback (Slideshow)................................................. 146 On a TV ...................................................................................... 186 On a computer.............................................................................. 26 Browse through images quickly.................................................. 141 Erase images.............................................................................. 152 E Shoot/View Movies Shoot movies.......................................................................... 44, 88 View movies ............................................................................... 136 c Print O PY Print pictures............................................................................... 202 Save C Save images to a computer.......................................................... 29 9
  • 10.
    Safety Precautions • Beforeusing the product, please ensure that you read the safety precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly. • The safety precautions noted on the following pages are intended to prevent injuries to yourself and other persons, or damage to the equipment. • Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use. Warning Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death. • Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes. Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight. In particular, remain at least one meter (39 inches) away from infants when using the flash. • Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants. Strap: Putting the strap around a child’s neck could result in asphyxiation. • Use only recommended power sources. • Do not attempt to disassemble, alter or apply heat to the product. • Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts. • To avoid the risk of injury, do not touch the interior of the product if it has been dropped or otherwise damaged. PY • Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke, a strange smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally. • Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product. O • Do not let the product come into contact with water (e.g. sea water) or other liquids. • Do not allow liquids or foreign objects to enter the camera. C This could result in electrical shock or fire. If liquids or foreign objects come into contact with the camera interior, immediately turn the camera off and remove the battery. If the battery charger becomes wet, unplug it from the outlet and consult your camera distributor or a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. • Do not look through the viewfinder at bright light sources (such as the sun on a clear day). This could damage your eyesight. • Use only the recommended battery. • Do not place the battery near or in direct flame. • Unplug the power cord periodically, and using a dry cloth, wipe away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power outlet, and the surrounding area. • Do not handle the power cord with wet hands. • Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if the power cord or plug are damaged, or not fully plugged into the outlet. • Do not allow dirt or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact the terminals or plug. The battery may explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock or fire. This could cause injury and damage the surroundings. In the event that a battery leaks and the battery electrolyte contacts eyes, mouth, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water. 10
  • 11.
    Safety Precautions • Turnthe camera off in places where camera use is prohibited. The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate caution when using the camera in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities. • Do not play the supplied CD-ROM(s) in any CD player that does not support data CD-ROMs. It is possible to suffer hearing loss from listening with headphones to the loud sounds of a CD-ROM played on an audio CD player (music player). Additionally, this could damage the speakers. Caution Denotes the possibility of injury. • When holding the camera by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects. • Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens. This could lead to injury or damage the camera. PY • When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing. This could result in burns or damage to the flash. O • Avoid using, placing or storing the product in the following places: - Places subject to strong sunlight C - Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F) - Humid or dusty areas These could cause leakage, overheating or an explosion of the battery, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns or other injuries. High temperatures may cause deformation of the camera or battery charger casing. • Viewing images on the camera screen for prolonged periods may cause discomfort. Denotes the possibility of damage to Caution the equipment. • Do not aim the camera at bright light sources (such as the sun on a clear day). Doing so may damage the image sensor. • When using the camera on a beach or at a windy location, be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera. This may cause the product to malfunction. 11
  • 12.
    Safety Precautions • Inregular use, small amounts of smoke may be emitted from the flash. This is due to the high intensity of the flash burning dust and foreign materials stuck to the front of the unit. Please use a cotton swab to remove dirt, dust or other foreign matter from the flash to prevent heat build-up and damage to the unit. • Remove and store the battery when you are not using the camera. If the battery is left inside the camera, damage caused by leakage may occur. • Before you discard the battery, cover the terminals with tape or other insulators. Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions. • Unplug the battery charger from the power outlet after charging is complete, or when you are not using it. • Do not place anything, such as cloth, on top of the battery charger while it is charging. Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort, resulting in fire. • Do not place the battery near pets. Pets biting the battery could cause leakage, overheating or explosion, resulting in fire or damage. PY • When putting the camera in your bag, close the screen to face inward to ensure that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen. • Do not attach any hard objects to the camera. O Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. C 12
  • 13.
    Initial Preparations Prepare forshooting as follows. Attaching Accessories Attach the strap. Attach the included strap to the camera as shown. On the other side of the camera, attach the strap the same way. Attach the lens cap to the strap. Remove the lens cap from the lens and attach the lens cap cord to the strap. Always remove the lens cap before turning PY the camera on. Try attaching the lens cap to the neck strap when the cap is not in use. Keep the lens cap on the lens when the O camera is not in use. Holding the Camera C Place the strap around your neck. When shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the camera securely to prevent it from moving. If you have raised the flash, do not rest your fingers on it. 13
  • 14.
    Initial Preparations Charging the Battery Before use, charge the battery with the included charger. Be sure to charge the battery initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery charged. Remove the cover. Insert the battery. After aligning the o marks on the battery and charger, insert the battery by pushing it in ( ) and down ( ). PY Charge the battery. For CB-2LC: Flip out the plug ( ) and plug O the charger into a power outlet ( ). C For CB-2LCE: Plug the power cord into the CB-2LC charger, then plug the other end into a power outlet. CB-2LCE The charging lamp turns orange and charging begins. When the charging is finished, the lamp turns green. Remove the battery. After unplugging the battery charger, remove the battery by pushing it in ( ) and up ( ). 14
  • 15.
    Initial Preparations • To protect the battery and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. • For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. • For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time possible with a fully charged battery, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Inserting the Battery and Memory Card Insert the included battery and a memory card (sold separately). Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera (p. 171). PY Check the card’s write-protect tab. O Recording is not possible on memory cards with a write-protect tab when the tab is in the C locked (downward) position. Slide the tab up until it clicks into the unlocked position. Open the cover. Slide the switch ( ) and open the cover ( ). Insert the battery. While pressing the battery lock in the direction of the arrow, insert the battery facing as shown and push it in until it clicks into the locked position. Terminals Battery Lock 15
  • 16.
    Initial Preparations If you insert the battery facing the wrong way, cannot be locked into the correct position. Always confirm that the battery is facing the right way and locks when inserted. Insert the memory card. Insert the memory card facing as shown until it clicks into the locked position. Make sure the memory card is facing the right way when you insert it. Inserting memory cards facing the wrong way may damage the Label camera. Close the cover. Lower the cover in the direction of the arrow and press it until it clicks into the closed PY position. C O Removing the Battery and Memory Card Remove the battery. Open the cover and press the battery lock in the direction of the arrow. The battery will pop up. Remove the memory card. Push the memory card in until it clicks, and then slowly release it. The memory card will pop up. 16
  • 17.
    Initial Preparations Using theScreen Prepare the screen for use. Open the screen ( ) and rotate it toward the lens 180° ( ). Close the screen in this orientation ( ). • The screen can only open to approximately 175° in direction . Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will damage the camera. Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation You can adjust the angle and orientation of the screen as needed, to suit shooting PY conditions. To protect the screen when the camera is not O in use, always keep it closed and facing the camera body. able to shoot a movie.C • If the screen is closed and facing the camera body, you will not be • When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the camera. To cancel reverse display, press the n button, choose [Reverse Disp.] on the 4 tab, and press the qr buttons to choose [Off]. 17
  • 18.
    Initial Preparations Setting the Date and Time A screen for setting the date and time is displayed the first time you turn the camera on. Be sure to specify the date and time, which is the basis for dates and times added to your images. Turn the camera on. Press the power button. The [Date/Time] screen is displayed. Set the date and time. Press the qr buttons to choose an option. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to specify the date and time. When finished, press the m button. O PY CSet the local time zone. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose your local time zone. Finish the setup process. Press the m button when finished. After a confirmation message, the setting screen is no longer displayed. To turn off the camera, press the power button. 18
  • 19.
    Initial Preparations • Unless you set the date, time, and local time zone, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify the correct information. • To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose in step 2 and then choose by pressing the op buttons or turning the 7 dial. Changing the Date and Time Adjust the date and time as follows. Access the camera menu. Press the n button. PY Choose [Date/Time]. Move the zoom lever to choose the 3 tab. O Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Date/Time], and then press the m C button. Change the date and time. Follow step 2 on p. 18 to adjust the settings. Press the n button to close the menu. • Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed. • The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a charged battery or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold separately, p. 182), even if the camera is left off. • Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed when you turn the camera on. Follow the steps on p. 18 to set the date and time. 19
  • 20.
    Initial Preparations Display Language The display language can be changed as needed. Enter Playback mode. Press the 1 button. Access the setting screen. Press and hold the m button, and then immediately press the n button. Set the display language. PY Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose a language, and then press the m button. C O Once the display language has been set, the setting screen is no longer displayed. • A clock icon is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the m button before you press the n button. In this case, press the m button to dismiss the clock icon and repeat step 2. • You can also change the display language by pressing the n button and choosing [Language ] on the 3 tab. 20
  • 21.
    Still Images Movies Trying the Camera Out Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies, and then view them. Shooting (Smart Auto) For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. Turn the camera on. Press the power button. The startup screen is displayed. Enter A mode. Set the mode dial to A. PY Aim the camera at the subject. As the camera determines the scene, it will make a slight clicking noise. C O Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper right of the screen. Frames displayed around any subjects that are detected indicate that they are in focus. Compose the shot. To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward i (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward j (wide angle). 21
  • 22.
    Trying the CameraOut Shoot. Shooting Still Images Focus. Press the shutter button lightly, halfway down. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. AF Frames PY If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, move the switch to raise the flash. It will O fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the C camera. Shoot. Press the shutter button all the way down. As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. Your shot remains displayed on the screen for about two seconds. Even while the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button again. 22
  • 23.
    Trying the CameraOut Shooting Movies Start shooting. If the flash is already up, push it down with your finger, into the camera. Elapsed Time Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time. Black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. Once recording begins, you can take your finger off the movie button. Finish shooting. PY Press the movie button again to stop shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. C O Recording will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. 23
  • 24.
    Trying the CameraOut Viewing After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. Enter Playback mode. Press the 1 button. Your last shot is displayed. Browse through your images. To view the previous image, press the q button or turn the 7 dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the r button or turn the 7 dial clockwise. Press and hold the qr buttons to browse PY through images quickly. Images appear grainy at this time. C O To access Scroll Display mode, turn the 7 dial rapidly. In this mode, turn the 7 dial to browse through images. To return to single-image display, press the m button. To browse images grouped by shooting date, press the op buttons in Scroll Display mode. Movies are identified by a icon. To play movies, go to step 3. 24
  • 25.
    Trying the CameraOut Play movies. Press the m button to access the movie control panel, choose (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button again. Playback now begins, and after the movie is finished, is displayed. To adjust the volume, press the op buttons. • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. Erasing the Images You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. PY Choose an image to erase. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to C O choose an image. Erase the images. Press the a button. After [Erase?] is displayed, press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Erase], and then press the m button. The current image is now erased. To cancel erasure, press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Cancel], and then press the m button. • You can also erase all images at once (p. 152). 25
  • 26.
    Included Software, PDFManuals The software and PDF manuals on the included CD-ROM are introduced below, with instructions for installation, saving images to a computer, and using the PDF manuals. Features of the Included Software After installing the software on the CD-ROM, you can do the following things on your computer. ZoomBrowser EX ImageBrowser Import images and change camera settings Manage images: browse, search, and organize Print and edit images Digital Photo Professional PY Browse, process and edit RAW images PDF Manuals C O The following PDF manuals are provided on the included CD-ROM. Software Guide Camera User Guide Refer to the software guide when using the Once you are familiar with the information included software. Windows and in Getting Started, refer to this guide for a Macintosh versions are provided. more in-depth understanding of camera operation. 26
  • 27.
    Included Software, PDFManuals System Requirements The included software can be used on the following computers. Adobe Reader is required to view the PDF manuals. Windows Windows 7 (including SP1) Operating System Windows Vista SP2 Windows XP SP3 Computers running one of the above operating systems Computer (preinstalled), with an included USB port Pentium 1.3 GHz or higher (still images), Core 2 Duo 2.6 GHz or Processor higher (movies) Windows 7 (64 bit): 2 GB or more RAM Windows 7 (32 bit), Windows Vista (64 bit, 32 bit), Windows XP: 1 GB or more (still images), 2 GB or more (movies) PY Interfaces USB Free Hard Disk 620 MB or more* Space Display C O 1024 x 768 resolution or higher * In Windows XP, Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0 or later (max. 500 MB) must be installed. Installation may take some time, depending on computer performance. Macintosh Operating System Mac OS X 10.5 – 10.6 Computers running one of the above operating systems Computer (preinstalled), with an included USB port Processor Intel Processor (still images), Core 2 Duo 2.6 GHz or higher (movies) RAM 1 GB or more (still images), 2 GB or more (movies) Interfaces USB Free Hard Disk 680 MB or more Space Display 1024 x 768 resolution or higher • Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including supported OS versions. 27
  • 28.
    Included Software, PDFManuals Installing the Software and PDF Manuals Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration. Insert the CD-ROM in the computer’s CD-ROM drive. Insert the included CD-ROM (DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk) (p. 2) in the computer’s CD-ROM drive. On a Macintosh computer, after inserting the disc, double-click the desktop disc icon to open it, and then double-click the icon displayed. Install the files. PY In Windows, click [Easy Installation], or on a Macintosh computer, click [Install]. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the O installation process. C If the [User Account Control] window is displayed in Windows, follow the on-screen instructions. Complete the installation. In Windows, click [Restart] or [Finish] and remove the CD-ROM after the desktop is displayed. On a Macintosh computer, click [Finish] on the screen after installation and remove the CD-ROM when the desktop is displayed. 28
  • 29.
    Included Software, PDFManuals Saving Images to a Computer Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.6 are used here for the sake of illustration. Connect the camera to the computer. Make sure the camera is off. Open the cover ( ). With the smaller plug of the included interface cable (p. 2) in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal ( ). Insert the larger plug of the interface cable in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. O PY Turn the camera on to access CameraWindow. C Press the 1 button to turn the camera on. On a Macintosh computer, CameraWindow is displayed when a connection is established between the camera and computer. For Windows, follow the steps introduced below. In the screen that displays, click the link to modify the program. 29
  • 30.
    Included Software, PDFManuals Choose [Downloads Images From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow] and then click [OK]. Double click . CameraWindow Save the images to the computer. PY Click [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. O Images are now saved to the Pictures folder C on the computer, in separate folders named by date. After images are saved, close CameraWindow, press the 1 button to turn the camera off, and unplug the cable. For instructions on viewing images on a computer, refer to the Software Guide. 30
  • 31.
    Included Software, PDFManuals • In Windows 7, if the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the icon in the taskbar. • To start CameraWindow in Windows Vista or XP, click [Downloads Images From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow] on the screen displayed when you turn the camera on in step 2. If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [Start] menu and choose [All Programs] [Canon Utilities] [CameraWindow] [CameraWindow]. • On a Macintosh computer, if CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock (the bar at the bottom of the desktop). • Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the included software, the following limitations apply. - It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible. - Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation. - RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images) may not be saved. - Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer. - Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, PY depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file sizes. - Some functions provided by the included software may not be available, such O as editing movies or returning images to the camera. Using the PDF Manuals C You can access the PDF manuals by double-clicking the desktop shortcut icons created when the included CD-ROM is used for installation. Adobe Reader is required to view the PDF manuals. 31
  • 32.
    Accessories Included Accessories Lens Cap Battery Pack Battery Charger DIGITAL Neck Strap (with cord) NB-10L*1 CB-2LC/ CAMERA NS-DC9 (with terminal cover) CB-2LCE*1 Solution Disk Interface Cable IFC-400PCU*1 Power Memory Card Card Reader Windows/ Macintosh PY Computer Cables AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 C O HDMI Cable HTC-100 TV/Video System Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST *1 Also available for purchase separately. *2 Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 and Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3 are also supported. *3 Bracket BKT-DC1, Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3, Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 are required to attach these accessories. *4 Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 is required to attach this accessory. *5 Requires Waterproof Case Weight WW-DC1. *6 Filter Adapter FA-DC58C is required to attach this accessory. CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION. 32
  • 33.
    Accessories Flash Units Speedlite*2 Macro Twin Lite Macro Ring Lite 580EX II, 430EX II, MT-24EX*3 MR-14EX*4 320EX, 270EX II Cases Waterproof Case Soft Case WP-DC44 *5 SC-DC75 Lens Accessories PY Canon-brand Lens Filter Lens Hood (58 mm dia.)*6 LH-DC70 O Canon PictBridge-Compatible Printers C Other Accessories Remote Switch RS60-E3 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended. This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/ or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis. 33
  • 34.
    Accessories O PY C 34
  • 35.
    1 Camera Basics Basiccamera operations and features O PY C 35
  • 36.
    On/Off Shooting Mode Press the power button to turn the camera on and prepare for shooting. To turn the camera off, press the power button again. Playback Mode Press the 1 button to turn the camera on and view your shots. To turn the camera off, press the 1 button again. • To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the 1 button. • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway (p. 37). • The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback PY mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by pressing the 1 button. O Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) C As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates the screen and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity. Power Saving in Shooting Mode The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (p. 37). Power Saving in Playback Mode The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity. • You can deactivate these power-saving features if you prefer (p. 174). • You can also adjust the timing of screen deactivation (p. 174). 36
  • 37.
    Shutter Button To ensureyour shots are in focus, always press the shutter button lightly (halfway) initially. Once the subject is in focus, press the button all the way down to shoot. In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the button halfway or all the way down. Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.) Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice, and AF frames are displayed around image areas in focus. Press all the way down. (From the halfway position, press fully to shoot.) PY The camera shoots, as a shutter sound is played. O Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. C • Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the shutter button halfway. • Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes, and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject moves) before the shutter sound ends. 37
  • 38.
    Optical Viewfinder To conservebattery power when shooting, you can use the optical viewfinder instead of the screen. Shoot the same way as when using the screen. Deactivate the screen. Press the p button to turn the screen off (p. 39). Adjust the diopter. As you look through the optical viewfinder, turn the dial one way or the other so that images look sharp. • The area visible in the optical viewfinder may differ slightly from the image area in your shots. • At aspect ratios other than 4:3, the area visible in the optical viewfinder differs from the image area in your shots. Check the PY settings before shooting. • The lens may be partially visible through the optical viewfinder at some zoom O positions. • Although the camera automatically focuses on subjects, face detection and C focusing is not possible. 38
  • 39.
    Shooting Modes Use themode dial to access each shooting mode. Auto Mode Fully automatic shooting, with camera-determined settings (pp. 21, 44). P, Tv, Av, M, C1, and Scene Mode C2 Modes Shoot with optimal settings for specific Take a variety of shots scenes (p. 68). using your preferred settings (pp. 91, 123). Creative Filters Mode Movie Mode Add a variety of effects to images For shooting movies (p. 88). when shooting (p. 71). You can also shoot movies when the mode dial is not set to Movie mode, simply by pressing the movie button. Shooting Display Options PY Press the p button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see p. 222. C No information is displayed O Information is Off Display 1 displayed Display 2 • Even if the screen is off, it will turn on when you start shooting a movie. • Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night display function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not affect recorded images. • For playback display options, see p. 138. 39
  • 40.
    FUNC. Menu Configure commonlyused functions through the FUNC. menu as follows. Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode (pp. 226 – 233). Access the FUNC. menu. Press the m button. Choose a menu item. Press the op buttons to choose a menu item. Available options are shown at the bottom of the screen. In some menu items, functions can be specified simply by pressing the m or r PY Options button, or another screen is displayed for Menu Items configuring the function. C O Choose an option. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an option. Options labeled with a icon can be configured by pressing the n button. Finish the setup process. Press the m button. The screen before you pressed the m button in step 1 is displayed again, showing the option you configured. • To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (p. 179). 40
  • 41.
    n Menu Configure avariety of camera functions through other menus as follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting (4), playback (1), and so on. Note that available settings vary depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (pp. 230 – 235). Access the menu. Press the n button. Choose a tab. Move the zoom lever or press the qr buttons to choose a tab. Choose a setting. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to PY choose a setting. To choose settings with options not shown, first press the m or r button to switch O screens, and then either press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to select the C setting. Press the n button to restore the previous screen. Choose an option. Press the qr buttons to choose an option. Finish the setup process. Press the n button to return to the screen displayed before you pressed the n button in step 1. • To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (p. 179). 41
  • 42.
    Indicator Display The powerlamp and indicator on the back of the camera (p. 5) will light or blink depending on the camera’s status. Indicator Indicator Color Camera Status Status On Camera on Power Lamp Green Blinking Low battery On Ready to shoot (when the flash is deactivated) Green Recording/reading/transmitting images Blinking Distance warning (p. 217), or cannot focus (when Indicator the flash is deactivated) (p. 217) On Ready to shoot (when the flash is activated) Orange Distance warning (p. 217), or cannot focus (when Blinking the flash is activated) (p. 217) PY • When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card. Clock You can check the current time. C O Press and hold the m button. The current time appears. If you hold the camera vertically while using the clock function, it will switch to vertical display. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to change the display color. Press the m button again to cancel the clock display. • When the camera is off, press and hold the m button, then press the power button to display the clock. 42
  • 43.
    2 Smart Auto Mode Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting O PY C 43
  • 44.
    Still Images Movies Shooting in Smart Auto Mode For fully automatic selection at optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. Turn the camera on. Press the power button. The startup screen is displayed. Enter A mode. Set the mode dial to A. Aim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper PY right of the screen (pp. 48, 49). Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. C O Compose the shot. To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward i (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward Zoom Bar j (wide angle). (A zoom bar showing the zoom position is displayed.) Focus Range (approx.) Shoot. Shooting Still Images Focus. Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. 44
  • 45.
    Shooting in SmartAuto Mode Several AF frames are displayed when multiple areas are in focus. AF Frames If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, move the switch to raise the flash. It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. Shoot. PY Press the shutter button all the way down. As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you O have raised the flash, it fires automatically. C Your shot remains displayed on the screen for about two seconds. Even while the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button again. Shooting Movies Start shooting. If the flash is already up, push it down with your finger, into the camera. Elapsed Time Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time. Black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. Once recording begins, you can take your finger off the movie button. 45
  • 46.
    Shooting in SmartAuto Mode Resize the subject and recompose the shot as needed. To resize the subject, do the same thing as in step 3 on p. 44. However, note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded. When you recompose shots, the focus, brightness, and colors will be automatically adjusted. Finish shooting. Press the movie button again to stop shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. Recording will stop automatically when the PY memory card becomes full. Still Images/Movies press the p button (p. 39). O • To activate the screen when the camera is on but the screen is blank, C • To restore camera sound if you have accidentally deactivated it (by holding the p button down while turning the camera on), press the n button and choose [Mute] on the 3 tab, and then press the qr buttons to choose [Off]. Still Images • A flashing icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred by camera shake. In this case, attach the camera to a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. • If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the subject. For details on the flash range, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. • The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing range (shooting range), see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. • To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be activated when shooting in low-light conditions. 46
  • 47.
    Shooting in SmartAuto Mode • A blinking h icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it again. • The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background (Multi- area White Balance). Movies Microphone • Before shooting a movie, lower the flash with your finger. Be careful not to touch the microphone when shooting a movie. Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent audio from PY being recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled. O • Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be recorded. C • To correct suboptimal image color that may occur in movie shooting (p. 60) after you recompose shots, press the movie button to stop recording, and then press it again to resume recording. • Audio is recorded in stereo. 47
  • 48.
    Shooting in SmartAuto Mode Scene Icons In A mode, shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color. Subject People Other Subjects Icon Background In Shadows In At Close Motion*1 on Face*1 Motion*1 Range Color Background Bright Gray Backlit — With Blue Sky Light Blue PY Backlit — O Sunsets — — Orange C Spotlights Dark Dark Blue Tripod *2 *2 — — Used *1 Not displayed for movies. *2 Displayed in dark scenes when the camera is held still, as when mounted on a tripod. • Try shooting in G mode (p. 91) if the scene icon does not match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or brightness. 48
  • 49.
    Shooting in SmartAuto Mode Image Stabilization Icons Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in A mode. Image stabilization for movies, Image stabilization for still reducing strong camera shake, images as when shooting while walking (Dynamic IS) Image stabilization for subtle Image stabilization for still camera shake, such as when images, when panning* shooting movies at telephoto (Powered IS) No image stabilization, because Image stabilization for macro the camera is mounted on a shots (Hybrid IS) tripod or held still by other means PY * Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera O shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake. C • To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120). In this case, an IS icon is not displayed. 49
  • 50.
    Shooting in SmartAuto Mode On-Screen Frames A variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are aiming the camera at. • A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face) determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the screen. • When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF). • Try shooting in G mode (p. 91) if no frames are displayed, if frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are displayed PY on the background or similar areas. C O 50
  • 51.
    Common, Convenient Features Still Images Movies Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, use digital zoom for up to about 16x enlargement. Move the zoom lever toward i. Hold the lever until zooming stops. Zooming stops at the largest possible zoom factor (before the image becomes grainy), which is displayed when you release the zoom lever. Zoom Factor Move the zoom lever toward i again. The camera zooms in even closer on the PY subject, using digital zoom. C O • Zoomed images may look grainy, under some resolution settings (p. 57) and zoom factors. In this case, the zoom factor is shown in blue. • Focal length when optical and digital zoom are combined is as follows (35mm film equivalent). 28 – 448 mm (28 – 112 mm with optical zoom alone) • To deactivate digital zoom, press the n button, choose [Digital Zoom] on the 4 tab, and then choose [Off]. 51
  • 52.
    Common, Convenient Features Still Images Movies Using the Self-Timer With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. Configure the setting. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and then choose the ] option (p. 40). Once the setting is complete, ] is displayed. O PY C Shoot. For Still Images: Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject, and then press it all the way down. For Movies: Press the movie button. Once you start the self-timer, the lamp will blink and the camera will play a self-timer sound. Two seconds before the shot, the blinking and sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the n button. To restore the original setting, choose in step 1. 52
  • 53.
    Common, Convenient Features Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot. Configure the setting. Follow step 1 on p. 52 and choose [. Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed. Follow step 2 on p. 52 to shoot. Customizing the Self-Timer You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10). PY Choose $. Follow step 1 on p. 52, choose $, and then O press the n button. C Configure the setting. Turn the z dial to choose [Delay], either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Shots], and then press the m button. Once the setting is complete, $ is displayed. Follow step 2 on p. 52 to shoot. • For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect. • When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. • When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) 53
  • 54.
    Common, Convenient Features Still Images Adding the Shooting Date and Time The camera can add the shooting date and time to images in the lower-right corner. However, note that these cannot be removed. Confirm beforehand that the date and time are correct (p. 18). Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [Date Stamp] on the 4 tab, and then choose the desired option (p. 41). Once the setting is complete, [DATE] is displayed. Shoot. O PY CAs you take shots, the camera adds the shooting date or time to the lower-right corner of images. To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. • Images originally recorded without the date and time can be printed with this information as follows. However, adding the date and time to images that already have this information may cause it to be printed twice. - Use camera DPOF print settings (p. 208) to print - Use the included software to print For details, refer to the Software Guide. - Print using printer functions (p. 202) 54
  • 55.
    Common, Convenient Features Still Images Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows. Specify Tracking AF. Press the o button. is displayed in the center of the screen. Choose a subject to focus on. Aim the camera so that is on the desired subject, and then press the shutter button halfway. A blue frame is displayed, and the camera will PY keep the subject in focus and image brightness adjusted (Servo AF). O Shoot. C Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot. Press the o button to cancel Tracking AF. • Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely. 55
  • 56.
    Image Customization Features Still Images Changing the Aspect Ratio Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows. Configure the setting. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and choose the desired option (p. 40). Once the setting is complete, the screen aspect ratio will be updated. To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose . PY Same aspect ratio as HDTVs, used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar O display devices. C Same aspect ratio as 35 mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes. Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes. Square aspect ratio. Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits. • At aspect ratios other than , digital zoom (p. 51) is not available ([Digital Zoom] is set to [Off]). 56
  • 57.
    Image Customization Features Still Images Changing Image Resolution (Size) Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Configure the setting. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and choose the desired option (p. 40). The option you configured is now displayed. To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose . O PY Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images) A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.) A3 – A5 (11.7 x C : For e-mailing images. 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.) 5 x 7 in. Postcard 3.5 x 5 in. 57
  • 58.
    Image Customization Features Still Images Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) Choose from two compression ratios, as follows: (Fine), (Normal). For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory card, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Configure the setting. Press the m button, choose in the menu, press the n button, and choose the desired option (p. 40). The option you configured is now displayed. To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose . O PY Red-Eye Correction C Still Images Red-eye that occurs in the flash photography can be automatically corrected as follows. Access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen. Press the n button, choose [Flash Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). 58
  • 59.
    Image Customization Features Configure the setting. Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then choose [On] (p. 41). Once the setting is complete, R is displayed. To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. • Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes (if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for example). • You can also correct existing images (p. 164). • You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by pressing the r button and immediately pressing the n button. PY Still Images Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps O In shots of evening scenes with subjects illuminated by mercury lamps, the C subjects or background may appear to have a greenish tinge. This greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-area White Balance. Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [Hg Lamp Corr.] on the 4 tab, and then choose [On] (p. 41). Once the setting is complete, is displayed. To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. 59
  • 60.
    Image Customization Features • After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake. • Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. Movies Changing Movie Image Quality 3 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Configure the setting. PY Press the m button, choose in the menu, and choose the desired option (p. 40). O The option you configured is now displayed. To restore the original setting, repeat this C process but choose . 60
  • 61.
    Image Customization Features Image Resolution Frame Rate Details Quality 1920 x 1080 24 fps For shooting in Full HD 1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD 640 x 480 30 fps For shooting in standard definition • In and modes, black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. Movies Using the Wind Filter Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when PY there is no wind. Configure the setting. C O Press the n button, choose [Wind Filter] on the 4 tab, and then choose [On] (p. 41). To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. 61
  • 62.
    Helpful Shooting Features Still Images Using the Electronic Level An electronic level can be displayed on the screen when shooting as a guideline to determine if the camera is level. Display the electronic level. Press the p button several times to display the electronic level. O PY Level the camera as needed. C Level the camera so that the center of the electronic level is green. • If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the n button, and on the 4 tab, choose [Custom Display]. Add a to or to choose the electronic level. • Tilting the camera too far forward or backward will prevent you from using the electronic level, which will turn gray. • The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording. • If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic level will be updated automatically to match the camera orientation. • If your shots are not level even if you use the electronic level, try calibrating the electronic level (p. 176). 62
  • 63.
    Helpful Shooting Features Still Images Magnifying the Area in Focus You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway to enlarge the image area in the AF frame. Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [AF-Point Zoom] on the 4 tab, and then choose [On] (p. 41). O PY Check the focus. C Press the shutter button halfway. The face detected as the main subject is now magnified. To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. • The display will not magnify if a face was not detected, or if the person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the screen. • The display will not magnify when using the digital zoom (p. 51) or Tracking AF (p. 55). 63
  • 64.
    Helpful Shooting Features Still Images Checking for Closed Eyes is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their eyes. Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [Blink Detection] on the 4 tab, and then choose [On] (p. 41). Shoot. A frame, accompanied by , is displayed when the camera detects a person whose eyes are closed. PY To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. O • When you have specified multiple shots in $ mode, this function is only C available for the final shot. 64
  • 65.
    Still Images Customizing Camera Operation Customize shooting functions on the 4 tab of the menu as follows. For instructions on menu functions, see “n Menu” (p. 41). Deactivating the AF Assist Beam You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions. Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [AF-assist Beam] on the 4 tab, and then choose [Off] (p. 41). To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. PY Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red- O eye when the flash is used in low-light shots. C Access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen. Press the n button, choose [Flash Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). Configure the setting. Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then choose [Off] (p. 41). To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. 65
  • 66.
    Customizing Camera Operation Changing the Image Display Period After Shots Change how long images are displayed after shots as follows. Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [Review] on the 4 tab, and then choose the desired option (p. 41). To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [2 sec.]. 2 – 10 sec. Displays images for the specified time. Displays images until you press the Hold shutter button halfway. Off No image display after shots. PY Changing the Image Display Style After Shots O Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows. C Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [Review Info] on the 4 tab, and then choose the desired option (p. 41). To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Off Displays only the image. Detailed Displays shooting details (p. 224). Shows the area in the AF frame magnified, enabling you to check the Focus Check focus. Follow the steps in “Checking the Focus” (p. 139). 66
  • 67.
    3 Other Shooting Modes Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured PY using special functions C O 67
  • 68.
    Still Images Movies Specific Scenes Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will automatically configure the settings for optimal shots. Enter K mode. Set the mode dial to K. Choose a shooting mode. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode (p. 40). Shoot. PY Still Images Movies I Shoot portraits (Portrait) O Take shots of people with a softening effect. C Still Images JShoot landscapes (Landscape) Movies Shoot majestic landscapes with a real sense of depth. Still Images VTake shots of kids and pets (Kids&Pets) Capture subjects that move around, such as children and pets, without missing photo opportunities. For details on the shooting range, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. 68
  • 69.
    Specific Scenes Still Images Shoot moving subjects (Sports) Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details on the shooting range, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Still Images Shoot evening scenes without using a tripod (Handheld NightScene) Beautiful shots of evening scenes, created by combining consecutive shots to reduce camera shake and image noise. PY When using a tripod, shoot in A mode (p. 44). O Still Images Movies C wShoot at the beach (Beach) Take shots of brightly lit people on sandy beaches where the reflected sunlight is strong. Still Images Movies S Shoot under water (Underwater) Natural-colored shots of sea life and underwater scenery, when you use an optional waterproof case (p. 184). 69
  • 70.
    Specific Scenes Still Images Movies OTake shots of foliage (Foliage) Shoot trees and leaves, such as new growth, autumn leaves or blossoms, in vivid colors. Still Images Movies P Shoot with snowy backgrounds (Snow) Bright, natural-colored shots of people against snowy backgrounds. Still Images Movies t Shoot fireworks (Fireworks) PY Vivid shots of fireworks. C O • Because the camera will shoot continuously in steady while shooting. mode, hold it • In mode, shooting conditions that cause excessive camera shake or similar issues may prevent the camera from combining images, and you may not be able to obtain the expected results. • In t mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120). • In V, , , and S modes, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed (p. 95) is increased to suit the shooting conditions. 70
  • 71.
    Still Images Movies Image Effects (Creative Filters) Add a variety of effects to images when shooting. Enter mode. Set the mode dial to . Choose a shooting mode. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode (p. 40). Shoot. PY • In , , , , , and modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. C O Still Images Movies Shoot in vivid colors (Super Vivid) Shots in rich, vivid colors. Still Images Movies Posterized shots (Poster Effect) Shots that resemble an old poster or illustration. 71
  • 72.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) Still Images Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tends to occur in high-contrast shots. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose . Hold the camera still. Mount the camera on a tripod or take other PY measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Shoot. C O When you press the shutter button all the way down, the camera will take three shots and combine them. • Set the [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120) in this mode. • Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry. • There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes and combines the images. 72
  • 73.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) Adding Color Effects Choose a color effect. Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose . Press the button, choose a color effect (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the button again. Effect Off — Sepia Sepia tone shots. B/W Black and white shots. Super Vivid Shots in rich, vivid colors. Poster Effect Shots that resemble an old poster or illustration. PY Still Images Movies Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) C O This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old photographs. Choose from five effect levels. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose . Choose an effect level. Turn the z dial to choose an effect level. Shoot. • Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect (p. 136). • The image aging effect is not applied to movies. 73
  • 74.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) Still Images Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-eye Effect) Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose . Choose an effect level. Turn the z dial to choose an effect level. A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. Shoot. PY Still Images Movies Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) C O Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and below your selected area. You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose . A white frame is displayed, indicating the image area that will not be blurred. Choose the area to keep in focus. Press the button. Move the zoom lever to resize the frame, and turn the 7 dial to move it. 74
  • 75.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) For movies, choose the movie playback speed. Turn the z dial to choose the speed. Return to the shooting screen and shoot. Press the button to return to the shooting screen, and then shoot. Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One- Minute Clips) Speed Playback Time Approx. 12 sec. Approx. 6 sec. PY Approx. 3 sec. O • The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the C zoom before shooting. • To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the qr buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the op buttons. • To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation press the op buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical orientation, press the qr buttons. • Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame. • Movie image quality is at an aspect ratio of and at an aspect ratio of (p. 56). These quality settings cannot be changed. 75
  • 76.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) Still Images Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose . Choose a color tone. Turn the z dial to choose a color tone. A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. Shoot. Standard Warm O PY Shots resemble toy camera images. Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]. Cool C Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]. 76
  • 77.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) Still Images Movies Shooting in Monochrome Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose . Choose a color tone. Turn the z dial to choose a color tone. A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. Shoot. B/W Black and white shots. PY Sepia Sepia tone shots. O Blue Blue and white shots. C 77
  • 78.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) Still Images Movies Shooting with Color Accent Choose a single image color to keep and change other colors to black and white. Choose T. Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose T. Access the setting screen. Press the button. The original image and the Color Accent image are displayed one after another. By default, green is the color that will be kept. Specify the color. PY Position the center frame over the color to keep, and then press the q button. O The specified color is recorded. C Specify the range of colors to keep. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to Recorded Color adjust the range. To keep only your specified color, choose a large negative value. To keep colors similar to your specified color as well, choose a large positive value. Press the button to return to the shooting screen. • Using the flash in this mode may cause unexpected results. • In some shooting scenes, images may look grainy and colors may not look as expected. 78
  • 79.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) Still Images Movies Shooting with Color Swap You can replace one image color with another before shooting. Note that only one color can be replaced. Choose Y. Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 71 and choose Y. Access the setting screen. Press the button. PY The original image and the Color Swap image are displayed one after another. By default, green will be replaced with gray. C O Specify the color to replace. Position the center frame over the color to replace, and then press the q button. The specified color is recorded. Specify the new color. Position the center frame over the new color, and then press the r button. The specified color is recorded. Specify the range of colors to replace. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to adjust the range. 79
  • 80.
    Image Effects (CreativeFilters) To replace only your specified color, choose a large negative value. To replace colors similar to your specified color as well, choose a large positive value. Press the button to return to the shooting screen. • Using the flash in this mode may cause unexpected results. • In some shooting scenes, images may look grainy and colors may not look as expected. O PY C 80
  • 81.
    Special Modes forOther Purposes Still Images Movies Auto Clip Recording (Movie Digest) You can make a short movie of a day just by shooting still images. Before each shot, the camera will automatically record a movie clip of the scene. Each clip recorded that day is combined into a single file. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose . Shoot. To shoot a still image, press the shutter button all the way down. Before shooting, the camera will automatically record a clip about 2 – 4 seconds long. PY • Clips may not be recorded if you shoot a still image immediately after O turning the camera on, choosing mode, or operating the camera in other ways. C • Battery life is shorter in this mode than in A mode, because clips are recorded for each shot. • Any sounds from camera operations during movie recording will be included in the movie. • mode movie quality is and cannot be changed. • Clips are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if they were recorded on the same day in mode. - If the movie file size reaches about 4 GB or the total recording time reaches approx. 1 hour - If a movie is protected (p. 148) - If a movie has been edited (p. 165) - When the daylight saving time (p. 19) or time zone settings have been changed (p. 175) - If a new folder is created (p. 173) - If the copyright information is changed or deleted (p. 177) • Some camera sounds will be muted. Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway, use camera controls, or trigger the self-timer (p. 169). • Movies created in mode can be viewed by date (p. 143). 81
  • 82.
    Special Modes forOther Purposes Still Images Auto Shooting After Face Detection (Smart Shutter) Auto Shooting After Smile Detection The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you pressing the shutter button. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose , and then press the button. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose , and then press the button. The camera now enters shooting standby PY mode, and [Smile Detection on] is displayed. Aim the camera at a person. O Each time the camera detects a smile, it will shoot after the lamp lights up. CTo pause smile detection, press the p button. Press the p button again to resume detection. • Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will continue shooting each time a smile is detected. • You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button. • The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible. • To change the number of shots, press the op buttons after choosing in step 1. [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot. 82
  • 83.
    Special Modes forOther Purposes Using the Wink Self-Timer Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose , and then press the button. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose , and then press the button. Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face of the person who will wink. PY Press the shutter button all the way down. The camera now enters shooting standby C O mode, and [Wink to take picture] is displayed. The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. Face the camera and wink. The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting a wink by the person whose face is inside the frame. To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the n button. • If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately. • Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses. • Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink. • If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. • To change the number of shots, press the op buttons after choosing in step 1. [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot. • If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks. 83
  • 84.
    Special Modes forOther Purposes Using the Face Self-Timer The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area (p. 108). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar shots. Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose , and then press the button. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose , and then press the button. Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face you focus on and white frames PY around other faces. Press the shutter button all the way C down. O The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Look straight at camera to start count down] is displayed. The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. Join the subjects in the shooting area and look at the camera. After the camera detects a new face, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) About two seconds later, the camera will shoot. To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the n button. • Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. • To change the number of shots, press the op buttons after choosing in step 1. [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot. 84
  • 85.
    Special Modes forOther Purposes Still Images High-Speed Continuous Shooting (High-speed Burst HQ) You can shoot a series of shots in rapid succession by holding the shutter button all the way down. For details on continuous shooting speed, and maximum number of continuous shots, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide). HQ: High Quality Choose . Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose . Shoot. Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. PY Shooting stops when you release the shutter button or reach the maximum number of O shots, after which [Busy] is displayed and the shots are shown in the order you took them. C • Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot. • The screen is blank while you are shooting. • There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can shoot again. Additionally, depending on the memory card, there may be a delay before you can shoot again. Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended. • Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. Images Displayed During Playback Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group, and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that the image is part of a group, is displayed in the upper left of the screen. • If you erase a grouped image (p. 152), all images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images. 85
  • 86.
    Special Modes forOther Purposes • Grouped images can be played back individually (p. 144) and ungrouped (p. 144). • Protecting (p. 148) a grouped image will protect all images in the group. • Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Filtered Playback (p. 141) or Smart Shuffle (p. 147). In this case, images are temporarily ungrouped. • Grouped images cannot be tagged as favorites (p. 157), edited (pp. 155 – 164), categorized (p. 158), or printed (p. 202), assigned as a start-up image (p. 170), and you cannot specify the number of copies to print (p. 210). To do these things, either view grouped images individually (p. 144) or cancel grouping (p. 144) first. O PY C 86
  • 87.
    Special Modes forOther Purposes Still Images Shooting Stitch Assist Images Shoot a large subject by taking multiple shots at various positions, and then use the included software to combine them into a panorama. Choose x or v. Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 68 and choose x or v. Take the first shot. The first shot will determine the exposure and white balance. PY Take additional shots. O Compose the second shot so that it partially C overlaps the image area of first shot. Minor misalignment of overlapping portions will be corrected automatically when the images are combined. Take up to 26 shots, the same way you took the second shot. Finish shooting. Press the m button. Use the software to combine the images. For instructions on merging images, refer to the Software Guide. • This function is not available when using a TV as a display while shooting (p. 187). • To use AF lock, assign % to the button (p. 131). 87
  • 88.
    Movies Shooting Various Movies Shooting Movies in E Mode Enter E mode. Set the mode dial to E. Configure the settings to suit the movie (pp. 226 – 234). Shoot. Press the movie button. To stop movie recording, press the movie button again. Locking or Changing Image Brightness Before Shooting Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop increments PY within a range of –2 to +2. O Lock the exposure. C Press the button to lock the exposure. The exposure shift bar is displayed. To unlock the exposure, press the button again. Adjust the exposure. Turn the 7 dial to adjust the exposure, as you watch the screen. Shoot. 88
  • 89.
    Shooting Various Movies Shooting iFrame Movies Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or devices. You can quickly edit, save, and manage iFrame movies using the included software. Choose . Set the mode dial to E. Press the m button, choose E in the menu, and then choose (p. 40). Black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. Shoot. PY • The resolution is (p. 60) and cannot be changed. • iFrame is a video format developed by Apple. C O 89
  • 90.
    O PY C 90
  • 91.
    4 G mode More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style O PY C • Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to G mode. • G: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure • Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than G, make sure the function is available in that mode (pp. 226 – 233). 91
  • 92.
    Still Images Movies Shooting in Program AE Mode (G Mode) You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting style. Enter G mode. Set the mode dial to G. Customize the settings as desired (pp. 93 – 120), and then shoot. • If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. To obtain adequate exposure, try adjusting the following settings. - Activate the flash (p. 116) - Choose a higher ISO speed (p. 95) • Movies can be recorded in G mode as well, by pressing the movie button. PY However, some H and n settings may be automatically adjusted for movie recording. • For details on the shooting range in G mode, see “Specifications” in the Getting O Started guide. C 92
  • 93.
    Still Images Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop increments, in a range of –3 to +3. As you watch the screen, turn the exposure compensation dial to adjust brightness. The correction level you specified is now displayed. O PY C Locking Image Brightness/Exposure (AE Lock) Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and exposure separately. Lock the exposure. Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked, and then press the button. is displayed, and the exposure is locked. Compose the shot and shoot. After one shot, AE is unlocked and is no longer displayed. • AE: Auto Exposure • After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the 7 dial (Program Shift). 93
  • 94.
    Image Brightness (ExposureCompensation) Changing the Metering Method Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting conditions as follows. Press the button, turn the 7 dial to choose the desired option, and then press the button again. The option you configured is now displayed. For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots. Evaluative Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions. Determines the average brightness of light across the entire image Center PY area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more Weighted Avg. important. Metering restricted to within the (Spot AE Point frame). You O Spot can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame. C Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame Set the metering method to Follow the step above to choose . . Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [Spot AE Point] on the 4 tab, and then choose [AF Point] (p. 41). The Spot AE Point frame will now be linked to the movement of the AF frame (p. 110). • Not available when [AF Frame] is set to [Face AiAF] (p. 108) or [Tracking AF] (p. 111). 94
  • 95.
    Image Brightness (ExposureCompensation) Changing the ISO Speed Press the o button, choose an option (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button. The option you configured is now displayed. Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the shooting mode and conditions. For shooting outdoors in fair weather. Low For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight. PY High For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms. O • To view the automatically set ISO speed when the camera is set to , press the shutter button halfway. C • Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject blurriness in some shooting conditions. • Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce subject blurriness and increase the flash range. However, shots may look grainy. • Press the button while in the setting screen to set . Adjusting the Maximum ISO Speed Maximum ISO speed when the camera is set to can be specified in a range of – . Access the setting screen. Press the n button, choose [ISO Auto Settings] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). 95
  • 96.
    Image Brightness (ExposureCompensation) Configure the setting. Choose [Max ISO Speed], and then choose the desired option (p. 41). Adjusting Sensitivity Choose from three levels of sensitivity for . Follow step 1 in “Adjusting the Maximum ISO Speed” (p. 95) to access the setting screen. Choose [Rate of Change], and then choose the desired option (p. 41). O PY • If you press the n button while in the ISO auto settings screen (p. 95), the [ISO Auto Settings] screen will appear. C Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR) You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low]. This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds. Choose a noise reduction level. Press the n button, choose [High ISO NR] in the 4 tab, and then choose the desired option. 96
  • 97.
    Image Brightness (ExposureCompensation) Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Mode) Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels (standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-stop increments. Choose . Press the m button, choose in the menu, and then choose (p. 40). Configure the setting. PY Press the n button, and then adjust the setting by pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7 dial. C O • AEB is only available in ! mode (pp. 22, 45). • Continuous shooting (p. 104) is not available in this mode. • If exposure compensation is already in use (p. 93), the value specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function. • You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the n button when the exposure compensation screen (p. 93) is displayed. • Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in $ (p. 53). • [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot. 97
  • 98.
    Image Brightness (ExposureCompensation) Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. To avoid washed-out highlights, specify Dynamic Range Correction. To preserve image detail in shadows, specify Shadow Correct. • Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. • You can also correct existing images (p. 163). • You can customize camera operation so that turning the z or 7 dial adjusts DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings (p. 129). Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) Choose from three correction methods. PY Press the m button, choose in the menu, O and choose the desired option (p. 40). Once the setting is complete, @ is displayed. C • With and , the ISO speed will be restored to if you attempt to set a speed higher than . • With , the ISO speed will be restored to if you attempt to set a speed lower than . • With , the ISO speed will be restored to if you attempt to set a speed lower than . 98
  • 99.
    Image Brightness (ExposureCompensation) Shadow Correct Press the m button, choose in the menu, press the n button, and choose (p. 40). Once the setting is complete, @ is displayed. Using the ND Filter To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values, use the ND filter, which reduces light intensity to 1/8 the actual level (equivalent to 3 stops). Press the m button, choose in the menu, PY and then choose (p. 40). C O • Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120). 99
  • 100.
    Color and ContinuousShooting Still Images Movies Adjusting White Balance By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more natural for the scene you are shooting. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and choose the desired option (p. 40). The option you configured is now displayed. Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting Auto conditions. PY Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather. Cloudy For shooting in cloudy conditions, in the shade, or at twilight. O For shooting under ordinary incandescent (tungsten) lighting Tungsten and similarly colored fluorescent lighting. Fluorescent Fluorescent H C For shooting under warm-white, cool-white, and similarly colored fluorescent lighting. For shooting under daylight fluorescent and similarly colored fluorescent lighting. h Flash For shooting with the flash. Sets the optimal white balance for shooting underwater. Tones S Underwater down blues to produce natural-looking colors overall. Custom For manually setting a custom white balance (p. 101). 100
  • 101.
    Color and ContinuousShooting Custom White Balance For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot. Follow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance” (p. 100) to choose or . Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so that the entire screen is white. Press the button. The tint of the screen changes once the white balance data has been recorded. • Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after recording white balance data. PY Manually Correcting White Balance You can manually correct white balance. This adjustment can match the color-compensating filter. C O effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or Configure the setting. Follow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance” (p. 100) to choose the white balance option. Turn the z dial to adjust the correction level for B and A. Configure advanced settings. To configure more advanced settings, press the n button and turn the z or 7 dial to adjust the correction level. To reset the correction level, press the button. Press the n button to complete the setting. 101
  • 102.
    Color and ContinuousShooting • The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you switch to another white balance option in step 1, but correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data. • B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green • One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter density) • You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen can be accessed simply by turning the z dial (p. 129). Still Images Movies Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia or black and white. PY Press the m button, choose in the menu, and choose the desired option (p. 40). O The option you configured is now displayed. My Colors Off C — Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images Vivid sharper. Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued Neutral images. Sepia Creates sepia tone images. B/W Creates black and white images. Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid Positive Film Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling images on positive film. Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones. Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones. 102
  • 103.
    Color and ContinuousShooting Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and Vivid Blue other blue subjects more vivid. Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, Vivid Green and other green subjects more vivid. Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more Vivid Red vivid. Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other Custom Color qualities as desired (see below). • White balance (p. 100) cannot be set in or modes. • With and modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may be modified. These settings may not produce the expected results with some skin tones. Custom Color PY Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5. C O Access the setting screen. Follow the steps in “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (p. 102) to choose and then press the n button. , Configure the setting. Press the op buttons to choose an option, and then specify the value by pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7 dial. For stronger/more intense effects (or darker skin tones), adjust the value to the right, and for weaker/lighter effects (or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to the left. Press the n button to complete the setting. 103
  • 104.
    Color and ContinuousShooting Still Images Continuous Shooting Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. Configure the setting. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and choose the desired option (p. 40). The option you configured is now displayed. Shoot. Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. Mode Description PY Continuous shooting, with the focus and exposure determined W Continuous when you press the shutter button halfway. Continuous Continuous shooting and focusing. O Shooting AF [AF Frame] is set to [Center] and cannot be changed. C Continuous shooting, with the focus fixed at the position Continuous determined in manual focusing. In t mode, focus is determined Shooting LV* by the first shot. * In t mode (p. 70), AF lock (p. 114), or manual focus mode (p. 106), is changed to . * For details on the continuous shooting speed in each mode, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. • Cannot be used with the self-timer (p. 52) or [Blink Detection] (p. 64). • Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. • As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. • Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. 104
  • 105.
    Shooting Range andFocusing Still Images Movies Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 28 mm, 35 mm, 50 mm, 85 mm, 100 mm or 112 mm (35mm film equivalents). This is convenient when you want to shoot at the angle of view of those focal lengths. Assign to the z dial (p. 128). Choose a focal length. Turn the z dial clockwise until it clicks to change the focal length from 28 mm to 35 mm. Keep turning the z dial to increase the focal length, which changes to 50 mm, 85 mm, 100 mm, and 112 mm at each click. PY • Step zoom is not available when shooting movies even if you turn the z dial. C O • When using the digital zoom (p. 51), turning the z dial clockwise will not change the zoom factor. However, turning the z dial counterclockwise will set the focal length to 112 mm. Still Images Shooting Close-ups (Macro) To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to e. For details on the focusing range, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Press the q button, choose e (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button. Once the setting is complete, e is displayed. 105
  • 106.
    Shooting Range andFocusing • If the flash fires, vignetting may occur. • Be careful to avoid damaging the lens. • In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, e will turn gray and the camera will not focus. • To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting with the camera set to [ (p. 53). Still Images Movies Shooting in Manual Focus Mode When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position you specified. For details on the focusing range, see “Specifications” in the PY Getting Started guide. Choose . C O Press the q button, choose (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button. and the MF indicator are displayed. Specify the general focal position. Referring to the on-screen MF indicator bar (which shows the distance and focal position) and the magnified display area, turn the 7 dial to specify the general focal position. Fine-tune the focus. Press the shutter button halfway to have the MF Indicator camera fine-tune the focal position (Safety MF). You can also fine-tune the focus by pressing the button. 106
  • 107.
    Shooting Range andFocusing • AF frame mode or size cannot be changed while focusing manually (p. 108). If you want to change the AF frame mode or size, cancel manual focus mode first. • Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (p. 51) or digital tele-converter, or when using a TV as a display (p. 187), but the magnified display will not appear. • To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it. • To hide the magnified display area, press the n button and set [MF-Point Zoom] on the 4 tab to [Off] (p. 41). • To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button is pressed halfway, press the n button and set [Safety MF] on the 4 tab to [Off] (p. 41). Still Images Movies Digital Tele-Converter PY The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.5x or 1.9x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it O would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor. C Press the n button, choose [Digital Zoom] on the 4 tab, and then choose the desired option (p. 41). The view is enlarged and the zoom factor is displayed on the screen. • Images will look grainy at a resolution (p. 57) of or . In this case, the zoom factor is shown in blue. • The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom (p. 51) and AF-point zoom (p. 63). • The digital tele-converter is only available when the aspect ratio is . 107
  • 108.
    Shooting Range andFocusing • The respective focal lengths when using [1.5x] and [1.9x] are 42.0 – 168 mm and 53.2 – 213 mm (35mm film equivalent). • The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the way toward i for maximum telephoto, and when you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 on p. 51. Still Images Movies Changing the AF Frame Mode Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as follows. Press the n button, choose [AF Frame] on the 4 tab, and then choose the desired option (p. 41). O PY Still Images Movies C Face AiAF • Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative metering only), and white balance ( only). • After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. • When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects, within a certain range. • After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are displayed around faces in focus. 108
  • 109.
    Shooting Range andFocusing • If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed (without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway. • If faces are not detected when Servo AF (p. 112) is set to [On], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the shutter button halfway. • Examples of faces that cannot be detected: - Subjects that are distant or extremely close - Subjects that are dark or light - Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden • The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces. • No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. Still Images PY FlexiZone/Center One AF frame is displayed. Effective for reliable focusing. With [FlexiZone], you can move and resize the AF frame (p. 110). C O • A yellow AF frame is displayed with if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. Note that AF-point zooming (p. 63) is not possible. Still Images Recomposing Shots While the Focus is Locked As long as you keep the shutter button pressed halfway, the focus and exposure are locked. You can recompose shots as needed before shooting. This feature is called Focus Lock. Focus. Aim the camera so that the subject is centered, and then press the shutter button halfway. Confirm that the AF frame displayed around the subject is green. 109
  • 110.
    Shooting Range andFocusing Recompose the shot. Keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, move the camera to recompose the shot. Shoot. Press the shutter button all the way down. Still Images Moving and Resizing AF Frames (FlexiZone) When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF frame mode to [FlexiZone] (p. 109). Prepare to move the AF frame. Press the button. The AF frame turns orange. PY Move and resize the AF frame. Turn the 7 dial to move the AF frame, or C O press the opqr buttons to move it by a smaller amount. To return the AF frame to the original position in the center, keep the button held down. To reduce the AF frame size, press the n button. Press it again to restore it to the original size. Complete the settings. Press the button. • AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital zoom (p. 51) or digital tele-converter (p. 107), and in manual focus mode (p. 106). • You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame (p. 94). 110
  • 111.
    Shooting Range andFocusing Still Images Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows. Choose [Tracking AF]. Follow the steps in “Changing the AF Frame Mode” (p. 108) to choose [Tracking AF]. is displayed in the center of the screen. Choose a subject to focus on. Aim the camera so that is on the desired subject, and then press the button. PY When the subject is detected, the camera beeps and is displayed. Even if the O subject moves, the camera will continue to C track the subject within a certain range. If no subject is detected, is displayed. To cancel tracking, press the button again. Shoot. Press the shutter button halfway. changes to a blue , which follows the subject as the camera continues to adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF) (p. 112). Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot. Even after your shot, is still displayed and the camera continues to track the subject. 111
  • 112.
    Shooting Range andFocusing • [Servo AF] is set to [On] and cannot be changed. • Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely. • [AF-Point Zoom] on the 4 tab is not available. • e is not available. • The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway without pressing the button. After your shot, is displayed in the center of the screen. Still Images Shooting with Servo AF This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as PY you press the shutter button halfway. O Configure the setting. C Press the n button, choose [Servo AF] on the 4 tab, and then choose [On]. (p. 41). Focus. The focus and exposure are maintained where the blue AF frame is displayed while you are pressing the shutter button halfway. • Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions. • In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF frame mode. • If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button, and then press it halfway again. • AF lock shooting is not available. • [AF-Point Zoom] on the 4 tab is not available. • Not available when using the self-timer (p. 52). 112
  • 113.
    Shooting Range andFocusing Still Images Changing the Focus Setting You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway. Press the n button, choose [Continuous AF] on the 4 tab, and then choose [Off] (p. 41). Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera On constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway. Conserves battery power, because the Off PY camera does not focus constantly. Still Images C O Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on. Set the AF frame to [Face AiAF] (p. 108). Enter Face Select mode. Aim the camera at the person’s face and press the button. After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a face frame is displayed around the face detected as the main subject. Even if the subject moves, the face frame follows the subject within a certain range. If a face is not detected, is not displayed. 113
  • 114.
    Shooting Range andFocusing Choose the face to focus on. To switch the face frame to another detected face, press the button. After you have switched the face frame to all detected faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed, and the specified AF frame mode screen is displayed again. Shoot. Press the shutter button halfway. After the camera focuses, changes to . Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot. PY Still Images Movies Shooting with the AF Lock C O The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button. Lock the focus. With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the q button. The focus is now locked, and and the MF indicator are displayed. To unlock the focus, after you release the shutter button, press the q button again and choose (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial). Compose the shot and shoot. 114
  • 115.
    Shooting Range andFocusing Still Images Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your specified focus can be set in three levels. Choose . Press the m button, choose in the menu, and then choose (p. 40). Configure the setting. PY Press the n button, and then adjust the setting by pressing the qr buttons or turning O the 7 dial. C • Focus bracketing is only available in ! mode (pp. 22, 45). • Continuous shooting (p. 104) is not available in this mode. • You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by choosing in step 1 on p. 106 and immediately pressing the n button. • Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in $ (p. 53). • [Blink Detection] (p. 64) is only available for the final shot. 115
  • 116.
    Still Images Flash Activating Flash You can have the flash fire for each shot. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide). Raise the flash. Move the switch. Configure the setting. Press the r button, choose h (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button. Once the setting is complete, h is displayed. • If the flash is lowered, the setting screen will not appear even if you PY press the r button. Move the switch to raise the flash, then configure the setting. Shooting with Slow Synchro C O With this option, the flash fires to increase the brightness of the main subject (such as people) while the camera shoots at a slow shutter speed to increase the brightness of the background that is out of the flash range. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide). Raise the flash. Move the switch. Configure the setting. Press the r button, choose Z (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button. Once the setting is complete, Z is displayed. 116
  • 117.
    Flash Shoot. Even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing. • Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120). • If the flash is lowered, the setting screen will not appear even if you press the r button. Move the switch to raise the flash, then configure the setting. Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation Just as with regular exposure compensation (p. 93), you can adjust the flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments. PY Raise the flash, press the r button and O immediately turn the z dial to choose the compensation level, and then press the m C button. Once the setting is complete, X is displayed. • When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure. However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing n (p. 41) and setting [Safety FE] in [Flash Control] on the 4 tab to [Off]. • You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by choosing X in the FUNC. menu (p. 40), or by accessing n (p. 41) and choosing [Flash Exp. Comp] in [Flash Control] on the 4 tab. • You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] n screen as follows (except when an external flash (sold separately) is attached to the camera). - Press and hold the r button for at least one second. - When the flash is up, press the r button and immediately press the n button. 117
  • 118.
    Flash Shooting with the FE Lock Just as with the AE lock (p. 93), you can lock the exposure for the flash shots. Raise the flash and set it to h (p. 116). Lock the flash exposure. Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked, and then press the button. The flash fires, and when is displayed, the flash output level is retained. Compose the shot and shoot. PY After one shot, FE is unlocked and is no longer displayed. O • FE: Flash Exposure Changing the Flash Timing C Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows. Access the setting screen. Press the n button, choose [Flash Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). Configure the setting. Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose the desired option (p. 41). 1st- The flash fires immediately after the shutter curtain opens. 2nd- The flash fires immediately before the curtain shutter closes. 118
  • 119.
    Still Images Shooting RAW Images RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s internal image processing. Use the included software to adjust RAW images as desired with minimal loss of image quality. Press the m button, choose in the menu, and choose the desired option (p. 40). Records JPEG images. JPEG images are processed in the camera for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce file size. However, the compression process is irreversible, and images cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed state. Image processing may also cause some loss of image quality. PY Records RAW images. RAW images are “raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera’s image processing. The data cannot be used in this state for viewing or printing on a computer. You must first use O the included software (Digital Photo Professional) to convert images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF files. Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality. C For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Records two images, both a RAW image and a JPEG image, for each shot. The JPEG image can be printed or viewed on a computer without using the included software. • When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images recorded together) to a computer, always use the included software (p. 26). • Digital zoom (p. 51), date stamps (p. 54), and red-eye reduction (p. 58) are set to [Off] in and modes. Additionally, i-Contrast (p. 163), My Colors (p. 102) and noise reduction level (p. 96) settings are not available. • The aspect ratio setting (p. 56) is only applied to JPEG images. RAW images are always shot at an aspect ratio of . • To erase images, display the image and press p button (p. 152). Choose from [Erase ], [Erase JPEG], or [Erase +JPEG] to erase the image. • The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for RAW images is .CR2. 119
  • 120.
    Other Settings Still Images Movies Changing the IS Mode Settings Access the setting screen. Press the n button, choose [IS Settings] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). Configure the setting. Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the desired option (p. 41). Optimal image stabilization for the Continuous shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (p. 49). Image stabilization is active only at the PY Shoot Only* moment of shooting. Off Deactivates image stabilization. O *The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie C recording. • If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]. 120
  • 121.
    Other Settings Movies Deactivating Powered IS Powered IS reduces slow camera shake that may occur when recording telephoto movies. However, this option may not produce the expected results when used for the stronger camera shake that may occur when shooting while walking or when moving the camera to match subject movement. In this case, set Powered IS to [Off]. Follow the steps in “Changing the IS Mode Settings” (p. 120) to access the [IS Settings] screen. Choose [Powered IS], and then choose [Off] (p. 41). PY • [Powered IS] settings are not applied when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]. C O 121
  • 122.
    O PY C 122
  • 123.
    5 Tv, Av, M,C1, C2 Mode Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and customize the camera for your shooting style O PY C • Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode. 123
  • 124.
    Still Images Specific Shutter Speeds (Tv Mode) Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed. For details on available shutter speeds, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Enter M mode. Set the mode dial to M. Set the shutter speed. Turn the z dial to set the shutter speed. • With slow shutter speeds, there will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes images to reduce noise. • When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set [IS PY Mode] to [Off] (p. 120). • Maximum shutter speed with the flash is 1/2000 second. O If you specify a faster speed, the camera will automatically reset the speed to 1/2000 second before shooting. C • Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is displayed in white, or use safety shift (p. 125). • M: Time value • You can customize camera operation so that turning the 7 dial changes the shutter speed (p. 129). 124
  • 125.
    Still Images Specific Aperture Values (Av Mode) Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value. For details on available aperture values, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Enter B mode. Set the mode dial to B. Set the aperture value. Turn the z dial to set the aperture value. • Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in white, PY or use safety shift (see below). • B: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the lens) O • To avoid exposure problems in M and B modes, you can have the camera C automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value, even when standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained. Press the n button and set [Safety Shift] on the 4 tab to [On] (p. 41). However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires. • You can customize camera operation so that turning the 7 dial changes the aperture value (p. 129). 125
  • 126.
    Still Images Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values (M Mode) Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure. For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide. Enter D mode. Set the mode dial to D. Configure the setting. Turn the z dial to set the shutter speed, and turn the 7 dial to set the aperture value. An exposure level mark based on your specified value is shown on the exposure level indicator for comparison to the standard PY exposure level. Aperture Value The exposure level mark is shown in orange O Shutter Speed when the difference from standard exposure exceeds 2 stops. “–2” or “+2” is displayed in Standard Exposure Level Exposure Level Mark Corange in the lower right when you press the shutter button halfway. Exposure Level Indicator • After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot. • Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to h. • To have both the shutter speed and aperture value automatically adjusted to obtain standard exposure, hold the shutter button halfway and press the button. Note that standard exposure may not be possible with some settings. 126
  • 127.
    Specific Shutter Speedsand Aperture Values (M Mode) • D: Manual • Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method (p. 94). • You can customize camera operation so that turning the 7 dial changes shutter speed and turning the z dial changes the aperture value (p. 129). Adjusting the Flash Output Choose from the three flash levels in D mode. Enter D mode. Set the mode dial to D. Configure the setting. Raise the flash, press the r button and immediately turn the z dial to choose the PY flash output level, then press the m button. Once the setting is complete, X is displayed. C O • You can also set the flash level by choosing X in the FUNC. menu (p. 40), or by accessing n (p. 41) and choosing [Flash Output] in [Flash Control] on the 4 tab. • You can set the flash level in M or B mode by accessing n (p. 41), choosing [Flash Control] on the 4 tab, and then setting [Flash Mode] to [Manual]. • You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] n screen as follows (except when an external flash (sold separately) is attached to the camera). - Press and hold the r button for at least one second. - When the flash is up, press the r button and immediately press the n button. 127
  • 128.
    Customization for ShootingStyles Still Images Movies Customizing Display Information Customize what information is shown in various display modes (switched by pressing the p button), and whether or not the information is shown on the LCD monitor or viewfinder. Access the setting screen. Press the n button, choose [Custom Display] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). Configure the setting. Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an item, and then press the m button. Items you choose for display are PY labeled with . In [LCD/Viewfinder] (p. 39), you can specify O to show or hide this information in LCD monitor or viewfinder display modes C (switched by pressing the p button). Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose the screen ( , press the m button. , or ), and then To hide this information in the display mode (accessed by pressing the p button), add to the icon. Note that the current display mode cannot be modified. Selected items (labeled with a ) will be included in display. Shooting Info Displays shooting information (p. 222). Grid Lines Displays a reference grid. Electronic Level Displays the electronic level (p. 62). Histogram Displays a histogram (p. 138), in G, M, B, and D modes. 128
  • 129.
    Customization for ShootingStyles • Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings screen. • Grayed-out items can also be specified, but they may not be displayed in some shooting modes. • Grid lines are not recorded in your shots. Still Images Movies Assigning Functions to the Front Dial and Control Dial Assign commonly used functions to the front dial and control dial, by shooting mode. PY Access the setting screen. O Press the n button, choose [Set z7 Func.] on the 4 tab, and then press the m C button (p. 41). Configure the setting. Press the qr buttons to choose an item. To configure the settings, press the op buttons, choose an item (either press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then turn the z dial to change the function. 129
  • 130.
    Customization for ShootingStyles Assignable Functions Functions you can assign to the front dial and control dial vary depending on shooting mode. On the setting screen, you can assign aspect ratio switching (p. 56), white balance correction (p. 100), step zoom (p. 105), or i-Contrast (p. 163) to modes indicated by in the following table. Shooting Mode Item D B M G z M B M Front Dial 1 7 B, z B B M Front Dial 2 7 M, z Control Dial PY 7 M, B B M • B: aperture value (p. 125); M: shutter speed (p. 124) O • When multiple functions are assigned to the 7 dial, press the button to C switch between them. 130
  • 131.
    Customization for ShootingStyles Still Images Movies Assigning Functions to the Button Access the setting screen. Press the n button, choose [Set Shortcut button] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). Configure the setting. Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose a function to assign, and then press the m button. Use the assigned function as needed. PY Press the button to activate the assigned function. O • To restore default settings, choose . • Icons labeled with indicate that the function is not available in the current C shooting mode or under current function conditions. • When the or function is used, each press of the button records white balance data (p. 101), and the white balance settings change to or . • When the % function is used, each press of the button adjusts and locks the focus, and % is displayed on the screen. • Pressing the button when the function is used deactivates screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following. - Press any button (other than the power button) - Hold the camera in another orientation - Open and close the screen - Raise and lower the flash 131
  • 132.
    Customization for ShootingStyles Still Images Saving Shooting Settings Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode dial to or . Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be retained this way. Settings that can be saved • Shooting modes (G, M, B, and D) • Items set in G, M, B, or D modes (pp. 93 – 126) • Shooting menu settings • Zoom positions • Manual focus positions (p. 106) • My Menu settings (p. 133) PY Enter a shooting mode with settings you want to save, and O change the settings as desired. C Configure the setting. Press the n button, choose [Save Settings] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button. Save the settings. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose the destination, and then press the m button. 132
  • 133.
    Customization for ShootingStyles • To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose or , change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting details are not applied in other shooting modes. • To clear information you have saved to or and restore default values, turn the mode dial to or and choose [Reset All] (p. 179). Still Images Movies Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menus (My Menu) Save up to five commonly used shooting menus as menus on the tab, for instant access to all of these items from a single screen. Access the setting screen. PY Press the n button, choose [My Menu settings] on the tab, and then press the O m button (p. 41). C Configure the setting. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Select items], and then press the m button. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose menus to save (up to five), and then press the m button. is displayed. To cancel saving, press the m button. is no longer displayed. Press the n button. 133
  • 134.
    Customization for ShootingStyles Rearrange the menu list order, as needed. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Sort], and then press the m button. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose a menu to move, and then press the m button. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to change the order, and then press the m button. Press the n button. • Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may not be available in some shooting modes. PY • To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the n button in Shooting mode, choose [Set default view] and press the qr buttons to choose [Yes]. C O 134
  • 135.
    6 Playback Mode Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways O PY • To prepare the camera for these operations, press the 1 button to enter C Playback mode. • It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other cameras. 135
  • 136.
    Still Images Movies Viewing After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. Enter Playback mode. Press the 1 button. Your last shot is displayed. Browse through your images. To view the previous image, press the q button or turn the 7 dial counterclockwise. To view the next image, press the r button or turn the 7 dial clockwise. Press and hold the qr buttons to browse through images quickly. Images appear grainy at this time. O PY To access Scroll Display mode, turn the 7 Cdial rapidly. In this mode, turn the 7 dial to browse through images. To return to single-image display, press the m button. To browse images grouped by shooting date, press the op buttons in Scroll Display mode. Movies are identified by a icon. To play movies, go to step 3. 136
  • 137.
    Viewing Play movies. To start playback, press the m button to access the movie control panel, choose (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button again. Adjust the volume. Press the op buttons to adjust the volume. Pause playback. To pause playback, press the m button. The movie control panel is displayed. To resume playback, press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose , and then press the m button. PY After the movie is finished, is displayed. O • To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. C • To deactivate Scroll Display, press the n button, choose [Scroll Display] on the 1 tab, and then choose [Off]. • For playback from the last image viewed, press the n button, choose [Resume] on the 1 tab, and then [Last seen]. • To change the transition shown between images, press the n button, choose [Transition] on the 1 tab, and then press the qr buttons to choose the effect. 137
  • 138.
    Viewing Still Images Movies Switching Display Modes Press the p button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see p. 222. No information is Simple Detailed Enables you to check displayed Information Information the focus (p. 139)* Display Display *Not shown for movies. • Switching display modes by pressing the p button is also possible immediately PY after you shoot, while your shot is displayed. However, simple information display is not available. To change the initial display mode, press the n button and choose [Review Info] on the 4 tab (p. 66). O Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) C Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display. Histogram High The graph in detailed information display is a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. The horizontal axis represents the degree of brightness, and the Low vertical axis, how much of the image is at Dark Bright each level of brightness. Viewing the histogram is a way to check exposure. The histogram can also be accessed while shooting (pp. 128, 224). 138
  • 139.
    Viewing RGBHistogram To view an RGB histogram, press the o button in detailed information display. The RGB histogram shows the distribution of shades of red, green, and blue in an image. The horizontal axis represents R, G, or B brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at that level of brightness. RGB Histogram Viewing this histogram enables you to check image color characteristics. Press the o button again to return to detailed information display. Still Images Checking the Focus PY To check the focus of your shots, you can magnify the area of the image that was in the AF frame at the time of shooting. C O Access Focus Check. Press the p button (p. 138). A white frame is displayed where the AF frame was when the focus was set. Gray frames are displayed over faces detected later, in Playback mode. The portion of the image in the orange frame is magnified. Switch frames. Move the zoom lever toward k once. The screen at left is displayed. To switch to a different frame when there are multiple frames, press the m button. 139
  • 140.
    Viewing Zoom in or out, or view other image areas. As you examine the focus, use the zoom lever to zoom in or out. Press the opqr buttons to adjust the display position. Press the n button to restore the original display in step 1. O PY C 140
  • 141.
    Browsing and FilteringImages Still Images Movies Navigating Through Images in an Index By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images you are looking for. Display images in an index. Move the zoom lever toward g to display images in an index. Moving the lever again will increase the number of images shown. To display fewer images, move the zoom lever toward k. Fewer images are shown each time you move the lever. Choose an image. Turn the 7 dial to scroll through the images. PY Press the opqr buttons to choose an image. O An orange frame is displayed around the selected image. C Press the m button to view the selected image in single-image display. Still Images Movies Filtering Image Display To find images on a memory card full of images, you can filter image display, restricting display to images matching a specific filter. You can also protect (p. 148) or erase (p. 152) sets of filtered images all at once. Jump to Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (p. 157). Jump Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specific date. Jump to My Category Displays the images of a specific category (p. 158). Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in Jump to Still/Movie mode (p. 81). Jump 10 Images Jumps by 10 images at a time. Jump 100 Images Jumps by 100 images at a time. 141
  • 142.
    Browsing and FilteringImages Filtering Display by , , , or Choose filter conditions. In single-image display, press the d button, and then press the op buttons to choose a search filter (jump method). When filtering by , , or , press the qr buttons to choose a filter condition. Turn the 7 dial to view only those images that Filter Conditions match your filter conditions. Press the n button to restore single- image display. View the filtered images. Press the m button to start browsing filtered images. The jump method and a yellow frame PY are displayed. To view images filtered by your chosen O condition, press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial. CPressing the d button will display [Filtered playback settings cleared]. To cancel filtered playback, press the m button. • When the camera has found no corresponding images for some filters, those filters will not be available. • Options for viewing filtered images (step 2) include “Navigating Through Images in an Index” (p. 141), “Viewing Slideshows” (p. 146), and “Magnifying Images” (p. 145). You can protect, erase, or print all filtered images at once by choosing “All Filtered Images” in “Protecting Images” (p. 148), “Erasing All Images” (p. 152), or “Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF)” (p. 208). • If you recategorize images (p. 158) or edit them and save them as new images (p. 160), a message is displayed and filtered playback ends. 142
  • 143.
    Browsing and FilteringImages Jumping by or Images Choose a jump method in single-image display by pressing the d button and then pressing the op buttons. Press the qr buttons to use the specified jump method. Press the n button to restore single- image display. Using the Front Dial to Jump Turn the front dial to jump images using the , , and functions. Choose a jump method in single-image display by turning the z dial and then pressing the op buttons. PY Turn the z dial to use the specified jump method. C O • Turning the z dial when browsing images in index display will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single-image display. However, if you have chosen switched to . or , the jump method will be Movies Viewing Movie Digest Movies Movies created in mode (p. 81) can be viewed by date. Choose a movie. Press the n button to choose [Movie Digest Playback] in the 1 tab, then choose a date. Play the movie. Press the m button to start playback. 143
  • 144.
    Browsing and FilteringImages Still Images Viewing Individual Images in a Group Grouped images shot in mode (p. 85) are generally displayed together, but they can also be viewed individually. Choose an image group. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image labeled , and then press the m button. View individual images in the group. PY Pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7 dial will display only images in the group. Pressing the d button will display [Display all C O images]. Press m to cancel group playback. • During group playback (step 2), you can browse through images quickly (“Navigating Through Images in an Index” (p. 141)) and magnify them (“Magnifying Images” (p. 145)). You can protect, erase, or print all images in a group at once by choosing “All Images in Group” in “Protecting Images” (p. 148), “Erasing All Images” (p. 152), or “Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF)” (p. 208). • To ungroup images so that you can view them individually, press the n button, choose [Group Images] on the 1 tab, and then choose [Off] (p. 41). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during individual playback. 144
  • 145.
    Image Viewing Options Still Images Magnifying Images Magnify an image. Moving the zoom lever toward k will zoom in and magnify the image. You can magnify images up to about 10x by continuing to hold the zoom lever. To zoom out, move the zoom lever toward g. You can return to single-image display by continuing to hold it. Move the display position and switch images as needed. To move the display position, press the PY Approximate Position of opqr buttons. Displayed Area To switch to other images while zoomed, turn the 7 dial. C O • You can return to single-image display from magnified display by pressing the n button. 145
  • 146.
    Image Viewing Options Still Images Movies Viewing Slideshows Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Access the setting screen. Press the n button and choose [Slideshow] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Configure the setting. Choose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (p. 41). PY Start automatic playback. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to C O choose [Start], and then press the m button. The slideshow will start a few seconds after [Loading image...] is displayed. Press the n button to stop the slideshow. • The camera’s power-saving functions (p. 36) are deactivated during slideshows. • To pause or resume slideshows, press the m button. • You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7 dial. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the qr buttons down. • [Play Time] cannot be modified when [Bubble] is chosen in [Effect]. • You can also start slideshows from single-image display by pressing and holding the m button and immediately pressing the button. 146
  • 147.
    Image Viewing Options Still Images Auto Playback of Similar Images (Smart Shuffle) Based on the current image, the camera offers four images similar to it that you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in many kinds of scenes. Choose Smart Shuffle. Press the n button, choose [Smart Shuffle] on the 1 tab, and then press the m button (p. 41). Four candidate images are displayed. O PY Choose an image. Press the opqr buttons to choose the C image you want to view next. Your chosen image is displayed in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate images. For full-screen display of the center image, press the m button. To restore the original display, press the m button again. Press the n button to restore single- image display. • Only still images shot with this camera are played back using Smart Shuffle. • [Smart Shuffle] is not available in the following cases: - There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera - An unsupported image is currently displayed - The current image is being played in filtered playback 147
  • 148.
    Still Images Movies Protecting Images Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera (pp. 152). Choosing a Selection Method Access the setting screen. Press the n button, and then choose [Protect] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Choose a selection method. Choose a menu item and a setting as desired (p. 41). PY To return to the menu screen, press the n button. C O • Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the card (pp. 171, 172). • Protected images cannot be erased by the camera. To erase them, cancel protection settings first. 148
  • 149.
    Protecting Images Choosing ImagesIndividually Choose [Select]. Following step 2 on p. 148, choose [Select] and press the m button. Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m button. is displayed. To cancel protection, press the m button again. is no longer displayed. Repeat this process to specify other images. Protect the images. Press the n button. A confirmation PY message is displayed. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to O choose [OK], and then press the m button. C • Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. 149
  • 150.
    Protecting Images Selecting a Range Choose [Select Range]. Following step 2 on p. 148, choose [Select Range] and press the m button. Choose a starting image. Press the m button. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m button. O PY C Choose an ending image. Press the r button to choose [Last image], and then press the m button. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m button. Images before the first image cannot be selected as the last image. 150
  • 151.
    Protecting Images Protect the images. Press the p button to choose [Protect], and then press the m button. • You can also choose the first or last image by turning the 7 dial when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed. Specifying All Images at Once Choose [All Images]. Following step 2 on p. 148, choose [All PY Images] and press the m button. Protect the images. O Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Protect], and then press the m C button. • To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4 of “Selecting a Range” or in step 2 of “Specifying All Images at Once”. 151
  • 152.
    Still Images Movies Erasing Images You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. Choose an image to erase. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image. Erase the images. Press the a button. After [Erase?] is displayed, press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Erase], and then press the m button. The current image is now erased. To cancel erasure, press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Cancel], and then PY press the m button. Erasing All Images C O You can erase all images at once. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (p. 148) cannot be erased. Choosing a Selection Method Access the setting screen. Press the n button, and then choose [Erase] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Choose a selection method. Choose a menu item and a setting as desired (p. 41). Press the op buttons to choose a selection method, and then press the m button. To return to the menu screen, press the n button. 152
  • 153.
    Erasing Images Choosing ImagesIndividually Choose [Select]. Following step 2 on p. 152, choose [Select] and press the m button. Choose an image. Once you follow step 2 on p. 149 to choose an image, is displayed. To cancel erasure, press the m button again. is no longer displayed. Repeat this process to specify other images. Erase the images. Press the n button. A confirmation PY message is displayed. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. Selecting a Range C O Choose [Select Range]. Following step 2 on p. 152, choose [Select Range] and press the m button. Choose images. Follow steps 2 – 3 on p. 150 to specify images. Erase the images. Press the p button to choose [Erase], and then press the m button. 153
  • 154.
    Erasing Images SpecifyingAll Images at Once Choose [All Images]. Following step 2 on p. 152, choose [All Images] and press the m button. Erase the images. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. O PY C 154
  • 155.
    Still Images Movies Rotating Images Change the orientation of images and save them as follows. Choose [Rotate]. Press the n button, and then choose [Rotate] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Rotate the image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image. The image is rotated 90° each time you press the m button. To return to the menu screen, press the PY n button. O • Movies with an image quality of or cannot be rotated. • Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (see below). C Deactivating Auto Rotation Follow these steps to deactivate automatic rotation by the camera, which rotates images shot in vertical orientation so they are displayed vertically on the camera. Press the n button, choose [Auto Rotate] on the 1 tab, and then choose [Off] (p. 41). 155
  • 156.
    Rotating Images • Images cannot be rotated when you set [Auto Rotate] to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the original orientation. • In Smart Shuffle (p. 147) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation. O PY C 156
  • 157.
    Still Images Movies Image Categories You can tag images as favorites and assign them to My Category (p. 158). By choosing a category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all of those images. • Viewing (p. 136), Viewing Slideshows (p. 146), Protecting Images (p. 148), Erasing Images (p. 152), Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF) (p. 208) Tagging Images as Favorites Choose [Favorites]. Press the n button, and then choose [Favorites] on the 1 tab (p. 41). PY Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m C O button. is displayed. To untag the image, press the m button again. is no longer displayed. Repeat this process to choose additional images. Finish the setup process. Press the n button. A confirmation message is displayed. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. • Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. • Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( ) when transferred to computers running Windows 7 or Windows Vista. (Does not apply to movies or RAW images.) 157
  • 158.
    Image Categories Organizing Images by Category (My Category) You can organize images into categories. Note that images are automatically categorized at the time of shooting, according to shooting conditions. :Images with detected faces, or images shot in I or V mode. :Images detected as , , or in A mode, or images shot in J, O, or mode. : Images shot in , w, S, P, or t mode. Choosing a Selection Method Access the setting screen. Press the n button, and then choose [My Category] on the 1 tab (p. 41). O PY Choose a selection method. Choose a menu item and a setting as desired C (p. 41). To return to the menu screen, press the n button. Choosing Images Individually Choose [Select]. Following step 2 above, choose [Select] and press the m button. Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image. 158
  • 159.
    Image Categories Choose a category. Press the op buttons to choose the category, and then press the m button. is displayed. To cancel selection, press the m button again. is no longer displayed. Repeat this process to choose additional images. Finish the setup process. Press the n button. A confirmation message is displayed. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. PY • Images will not be assigned to a category if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 4. Selecting a Range C O Choose [Select Range]. Following step 2 on p. 158, choose [Select Range] and press the m button. Choose images. Follow steps 2 – 3 on p. 150 to specify images. Choose a category. Press the p button to choose the type of image, and then press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose a category. Finish the setup process. Press the p button to choose [Select], and then press the m button. • You can clear the selection of all images in the [Select Range] category by choosing [Deselect] in step 4. 159
  • 160.
    Still Images Editing Still Images • Image editing (pp. 160 – 164) is only available when the memory card has sufficient free space. Resizing Images Save a copy of images at a lower resolution. Choose [Resize]. Press the n button, and then choose [Resize] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m PY button. Choose an image size. O Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose the size, and then press the m Cbutton. [Save new image?] is displayed. Save the new image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. The image is now saved as a new file. Review the new image. Press the n button. [Display new image?] is displayed. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Yes], and then press the m button. The saved image is now displayed. 160
  • 161.
    Editing Still Images • Editing is not possible for images saved as in step 3. • RAW images cannot be edited. • Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution. Cropping You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file. Choose [Trimming]. Press the n button, and then choose [Trimming] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Choose an image. PY Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m O button. Cropping Area C Resolution After Cropping Adjust the cropping area. A frame is displayed around the portion of the image to be cropped. The original image is shown in the upper left, and a preview of the image as cropped is shown in the lower right. To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. To move the frame, press the opqr buttons. To change the frame orientation, press the Preview of Image m button. After Cropping Faces detected in the image are shown with gray frames around them (in the upper-left image), which can be used for cropping. Switch between frames as needed by turning the 7 dial. Press the n button. Save as a new image and review. Follow steps 4 – 5 on p. 160. 161
  • 162.
    Editing Still Images • Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of (p. 57) or resized to (p. 160). • RAW images cannot be edited. • Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping. • Cropped images will have a smaller resolution than uncropped images. Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate file. For details on each option, see p. 102. Choose [My Colors]. Press the n button, and then choose [My Colors] on the 1 tab (p. 41). PY Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to C button. O choose an image, and then press the m Choose an option. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an option, and then press the m button. Save as a new image and review. Follow steps 4 – 5 on p. 160. • Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color. • Colors of RAW images cannot be edited. • The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color of images shot using My Colors (p. 102). 162
  • 163.
    Editing Still Images Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the image as a separate file. Choose [i-Contrast]. Press the n button, and then choose [i- Contrast] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m button. PY Choose an option. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to C O choose an option, and then press the m button. Save as a new image and review. Follow steps 4 – 5 on p. 160. • For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. • Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function. • RAW images cannot be edited this way. • If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using [Low], [Medium], or [High]. 163
  • 164.
    Editing Still Images Correcting Red-Eye Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the corrected image as a separate file. Choose [Red-Eye Correction]. Press the n button, and then choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the 1 tab (p. 41). Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image. Correct the image. Press the m button. Red-eye detected by the camera is now PY corrected, and frames are displayed around corrected image areas. O Enlarge or reduce images as needed. Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images” (p. 145). C Save as a new image and review. Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [New File], and then press the m button. The image is now saved as a new file. Follow step 5 on p. 160. • Some images may not be corrected accurately. • To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased. • Protected images cannot be overwritten. • RAW images cannot be edited this way. • Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in , but the original image cannot be overwritten. 164
  • 165.
    Movies Editing Movies You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end. Choose *. Following steps 1 – 3 on p. 136, choose * and press the m button. The movie editing panel and editing bar are now displayed. Movie Editing Panel Specify portions to cut. Press the op buttons to choose or . To view the portions you can cut (identified by on the screen), press the qr buttons or PY turn the 7 dial to move . Cut the beginning of the movie (from ) by choosing , and cut the end of the movie by choosing . Movie Editing Bar C O Even if you move to a position other than a mark, choosing portion from the nearest choosing will only cut the to the left, and will cut the portion from the nearest to the right. Review the edited movie. Press the op buttons to choose , and then press the m button. The edited movie is now played. To edit the movie again, repeat step 2. To cancel editing, press the op buttons to choose . Press the m button, choose [OK] (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button again. 165
  • 166.
    Editing Movies Save the edited movie. Press the op buttons to choose , and then press the m button. Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [New File], and then press the m button. The movie is now saved as a new file. • To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased. • Only [Overwrite] is available when memory cards lack sufficient free space. • Movies may not be saved if the battery runs out while saving is in progress. • When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery or an PY AC adapter kit (sold separately, p. 182). C O 166
  • 167.
    7 Setting Menu Customizeor adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience O PY C 167
  • 168.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Functions can be configured on the 3 tab. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience (p. 41). Silencing Camera Operations Silence camera sounds and movies as follows. Choose [Mute], and then choose [On]. • Operation can also be silenced by holding down the p button as you turn the camera on. • Sound is not played during movies if you mute camera sounds (p. 136). To PY restore sound during movies, press the o button. Adjust volume with the op buttons, as needed. Adjusting the Volume C O Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows. Choose [Volume], and then press the m button. Choose an item, and then press the qr buttons to adjust the volume. 168
  • 169.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Customizing Sounds Customize camera operating sounds as follows. Choose [Sound Options], and then press the m button. Choose an item, and then press the qr buttons to choose an option. Preset sounds 1, 2 (cannot be modified) Preset sounds 3 Can be changed by using the included software. • The default shutter sound is used in mode (p. 85), regardless of any changes to [Shutter Sound]. Hiding Hints and Tips O PY Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. menu (p. 40) or C Menu (p. 41) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information. Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose [Off]. 169
  • 170.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Screen Brightness Adjust screen brightness as follows. Choose [LCD Brightness], and then press the qr buttons to adjust the brightness. • For maximum brightness, press and hold the p button for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the 3 tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and hold the p button again for at least one second or restart the camera. PY Start-up Screen O Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as follows. C Choose [Start-up Image], and then press the m button. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an option. No start-up image Preset images 1, 2 (cannot be modified) Preset images 3 Assign desired shots, or use the included software to change the image. 170
  • 171.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Customizing the Start-up Screen Access the [Start-up Image] screen in Playback mode. Press the 1 button. Following the previous procedure, choose [3] and press the m button. Choose one of your shots. Choose an image and press the m button. After [Register?] is displayed, choose [OK] (either press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial), and then press the m button. PY • The previous start-up setting is overwritten when you assign a new start-up image. C O • You can assign the operating sounds and start-up images for your camera from the included software. For details, refer to the Software Guide. Formatting Memory Cards Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you should format the card with this camera. Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. An Eye-Fi card (p. 212) contains software on the card itself. Before formatting an Eye-Fi card, install the software on a computer. Access the [Format] screen. Choose [Format], and then press the m button. Choose [OK]. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. 171
  • 172.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Format the memory card. To begin the formatting process, press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. When formatting is finished, [Memory card formatting complete] is displayed. Press the m button. • Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards. • The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the advertised capacity. PY Low-Level Formatting O Perform low-level formatting in these cases: [Memory card error] is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is slower, C continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. Perform low-level formatting. On the screen in step 2 on p. 171, press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Low Level Format], and then select this option (mark with a ) by pressing the qr buttons. Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], press the m button, and then follow step 3 on p. 171 to format (low- level format) the memory card. • Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (p. 171), because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card. • You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally. 172
  • 173.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions File Numbering Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change how the camera assigns file numbers. Choose [File Numbering], and then choose an option. Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot Continuous is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards. Image numbering is reset to 0 if you Auto Reset switch memory cards, or when a new folder is created. PY • Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted (p. 171)) memory card. O • Refer to the Software Guide for information on the card folder structure and image formats. Date-Based Image Storage C Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day. Choose [Create Folder], and then choose [Daily]. Images will now be saved in folders created on the shooting date. 173
  • 174.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Lens Retraction Timing The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the 1 button in Shooting mode (p. 36). To have the lens retracted immediately after you press the 1 button, set the retraction timing to [0 sec.]. Choose [Lens Retract], and then choose [0 sec.]. Power-Saving Adjustment PY Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (p. 36). O Access the [Power Saving] screen. C Choose [Power Saving], and then press the m button. Configure the settings. After choosing an item, press the qr buttons to adjust it as needed. • To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off]. • The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off]. 174
  • 175.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions World Clock To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/ Time setting manually. Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time (p. 18) and your home time zone. Specify your destination. Choose [Time Zone], and then press the m button. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [ World], and then press the m button. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to PY choose the destination. To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), O press the op buttons to choose . Press the m button. C Switch to the destination time zone. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [ World], and then press the n button. is now shown on the shooting screen (p. 222). • Adjusting the date or time while in mode (p. 19) will automatically update your [ Home] time and date. 175
  • 176.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Date and Time Adjust the date and time as follows. Access the [Date/Time] screen. Choose [Date/Time], and then press the m button. Configure the setting. Press the qr buttons to choose an item, and then adjust the setting, either by pressing the op buttons or turning the 7 dial. Metric/Non-Metric Display Change the unit of measurement shown in the MF indicator (p. 106) and PY zoom bar (p. 44) from m/cm to ft/in as needed. Choose [Distance Units], and then choose [ft/ O in]. C Electronic Level Calibration Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the camera. For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (p. 128) to help you level the camera in advance. Level the camera. Mount the camera on a tripod and make sure it is level. 176
  • 177.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Access the [Electronic Level] screen. Choose [Electronic Level], and then press the m button. Calibrate the electronic level. Choose [Calibrate] and press the m button. A confirmation message is displayed. Choose [OK], and then press the m button. Resetting the Electronic Level Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level. Choose [Electronic Level], and then press the PY m button. Choose [Reset], and then press the m button. O Once the electronic level has been reset, the C menu screen is displayed again. Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this information beforehand as follows. Access the setting screen. Choose [Copyright Info], and then press the m button. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or [Enter Copyright Details], and then press the m button. 177
  • 178.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Enter a name. Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose a character, and then press the m button to enter it. Up to 63 characters can be used. Press the a button to delete single characters. Turn the z dial or choose or and press the m button to move the cursor. Save the settings. Press the n button. [Accept changes?] is displayed. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Yes], and then press the m button. The information set here will now be recorded PY in images. • To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info] on the screen O in step 1, and then press the m button. C • You can also use the included software (p. 26) to enter, change, and delete copyright information. Some characters entered with the included software may not display on the camera, but will be correctly recorded in images. • You can view, change, and delete copyright information recorded in images by using the included software after saving images to a computer. Deleting All Copyright Information You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same time as follows. Follow step 1 on p. 177 and choose [Delete Copyright Info]. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. • The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted. 178
  • 179.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions Display Language Change the display language as needed. Access the [Language] screen. Choose [Language ], and then press the m button. Configure the setting. Press the opqr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose a language, and then press the m button. • You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and holding the m button and immediately pressing the n button. PY Adjusting Other Settings The following settings can also be adjusted on the 3 tab. • [Video System] (p. 187) • [Ctrl via HDMI] (p. 188) • [Eye-Fi Settings] (p. 212) C O Restoring Defaults If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings. Access the [Reset All] screen. Choose [Reset All], and then press the m button. Restore default settings. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. Default settings are now restored. 179
  • 180.
    Adjusting Basic CameraFunctions • The following functions are not restored to default settings. - 3 tab settings [Time Zone] (p. 175), [Date/Time] (p. 176), [Language ] (p. 179), [Video System] (p. 186), and the image assigned to [Start-up Image] (p. 170) - Custom white balance data you have recorded (p. 101) - Colors chosen in Color Accent (p. 78) or Color Swap (p. 79) - Shooting mode chosen in K (p. 68) or (p. 71) mode - Exposure compensation (p. 93) setting - The movie mode (p. 88) - Calibrated value for the electronic level (p. 176) - Copyright information (p. 177) O PY C 180
  • 181.
    8 Accessories Use includedaccessories effectively and enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories PY and other compatible accessories sold separately C O 181
  • 182.
    Tips on UsingIncluded Accessories Effective Battery and Charger Use • Charge the battery on (or immediately before) the day of use Charged batteries gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. You can easily check the charge state of the battery by attaching the cover so that o is visible on a charged battery, and attaching it so that o is not visible on an uncharged battery. • Long-term battery storage After using up all remaining battery power, remove the battery from the camera. Store the battery with the cover attached. Storing a partially charged battery over extended periods (about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance. • Using the battery charger abroad The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the PY plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery. O Optional Accessories C The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available. Power Supplies Battery Pack NB-10L Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Battery Charger CB-2LC Charger for Battery Pack NB-10L AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 For powering the camera using household power. Recommended when using the camera over extended periods, or when connecting the camera to a printer or computer. Cannot be used to charge the camera battery. 182
  • 183.
    Optional Accessories •The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). • For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery. Flash Units Speedlite 580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II Shoe-mounted flash unit that enables many styles of flash photography. Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 Prevents unnatural shadows next to subjects PY during vertical shooting. Includes Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3. C O Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2 Enables wireless control of slave Speedlite flash units. Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX External macro flash units that enable many styles of macro flash photography. The Macro Twin Lite requires Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1, Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the camera. The Macro Ring Lite requires Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 (sold separately) for attachment to the camera. 183
  • 184.
    Optional Accessories Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3 Used to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to the camera. Bracket BKT-DC1 Used to attach a Macro Twin Lite flash to the camera. Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 Used to attach a Macro Ring Lite or Macro Twin Lite flash to the camera. PY Other Accessories Soft Case SC-DC75 C O Protects the camera from dust and scratches. Handle with care to prevent leather discoloration. Waterproof Case WP-DC44 For underwater photography at depths of up to 40 meters (130 ft.). Also useful for shooting in the rain, at the beach, or on ski slopes. Waterproof Case Weight WW-DC1 Prevents the waterproof case from floating during underwater photography. HDMI Cable HTC-100 For connecting the camera to an HDMI input of a high-definition TV. 184
  • 185.
    Optional Accessories Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy playback on the larger TV screen. Remote Switch RS60-E3 Enables remote shutter button operation (pressing the button halfway or all the way down). Lens Hood LH-DC70 Prevents extraneous light outside the angle of view from entering the lens and causing flares or ghosting, which reduce image quality. PY Filter Adapter FA-DC58C Adapter required when mounting a 58 mm filter. C O Canon Lens Filter (58 mm dia.) Protects the lens and enables a variety of shooting effects. • A lens hood and filter adapter cannot be attached to the camera at the same time. Printers Canon PictBridge-Compatible Printers Printing images without a computer is possible by connecting the camera to a Canon PictBridge-compatible printer. For details, visit your nearest Canon dealer. SELPHY PIXMA Series Series 185
  • 186.
    Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies Playback on a TV By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger screen of the TV. For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual. • Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (p. 224). Playback on a Standard-Definition TV Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST (sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV as you control the camera. Make sure the camera and TV are PY off. Connect the camera to the TV. O White Red Yellow Yellow On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into the Red White Cvideo inputs as shown. On the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. Turn the TV on and switch to video input. Switch the TV input to the video input you connected the cable to in step 2. 186
  • 187.
    Using Optional Accessories Turn the camera on. Press the 1 button to turn the camera on. Images from the camera are now displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) When finished, turn off the camera and TV before disconnecting the cable. • Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the video output format, press the n button and choose [Video System] on the 3 tab. • When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when using the camera screen. PY Playback on a High-Definition TV Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold Movies shot at a resolution of or O separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV. C can be viewed in high-definition. Make sure the camera and TV are off. Connect the camera to the TV. On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into the HDMI input as shown. On the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. 187
  • 188.
    Using Optional Accessories Display images. Follow steps 3 – 4 on p. 186 to display images. • Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an HDTV. Controlling the Camera with a TV Remote Connecting the camera to an HDMI CEC-compatible TV enables playback (including slideshow playback) using the TV remote control. In this case, you will need to adjust some TV settings. For details, refer to the TV user manual. Configure the settings. Press the n button, choose [Ctrl via PY HDMI] on the 3 tab, and then choose [Enable] (p. 41). O Connect the camera to the TV. C Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 187 to connect the camera to the TV. Display images. Turn on the TV. On the camera, press the 1 button. Images from the camera are now displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) Control the camera with the TV remote. Press the qr buttons on the remote to browse images. To display the camera control panel, press the OK/Select button. Select control panel items by pressing the qr buttons to choose an item, and then pressing the OK/Select button again. 188
  • 189.
    Using Optional Accessories Camera Control Panel Options Shown on the TV Return Closes the menu. Displays sets of images shot in mode (p. 85). (Only Group Playback displayed when a grouped image is selected.) Starts movie playback. (Only displayed when a movie is Play Movie selected.) Starts slideshow playback. To switch images during . Slideshow playback, press the qr buttons on the remote control. Index Playback Displays multiple images in an index. l Change Display Switches display modes (p. 39). • Pressing any buttons on the camera will switch control to the camera itself, which will prevent remote control until you return to single-image display. • The camera may not always respond correctly even if the remote is for an HDMI PY CEC-compatible TV. O Powering the Camera with Household Power C Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC80 (sold separately) eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level. Make sure the camera is off. Connect the adapter to the coupler. Insert the adapter plug fully into the coupler. 189
  • 190.
    Using Optional Accessories Insert the coupler. Follow step 2 on p. 15 to open the cover, and then insert the coupler as shown until it locks into place. Close the cover ( ) making sure the coupler cable fits into the coupler cable port ( ) and press downward until it clicks into place. PY Coupler Cable Port C O Connect the power cord. Insert one end of the power cord into the compact power adapter, and then plug the other end into a power outlet. Turn the camera on and use it as desired. When finished, turn the camera off and unplug the power cord from the outlet. • Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera. • Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. 190
  • 191.
    Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately) For wide-angle shots of backlit subjects without using the flash, attach optional Lens Hood LH-DC70 to prevent light outside the angle of view from entering the lens. Attach the hood. Align the lens hood mark ( ) with the camera mark ( ), and turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it locks in place. To remove the lens hood, turn it the opposite direction. O PY C • Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in flash when the lens hood is attached. • The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the camera at the same time. 191
  • 192.
    Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately) Attaching a lens filter to the camera protects the lens and allows you to shoot with various effects. To attach a lens filter, you will need Filter Adapter FA- DC58C (sold separately). Attach the filter adapter. Align the notches on the camera and the filter adapter and turn the adapter in the direction of the arrow until locked. To remove the filter adapter, turn it in the opposite direction. Attach a filter. PY Turn the filter in the direction of the arrow to attach it to the camera. Make sure not to attach the filter too tightly. C O Doing so could prevent removal of the filter and damage the camera. • We recommend the use of genuine Canon filters (58 mm dia.). • When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option [Safety MF] to [On]. • If you use the built-in flash with the filter adapter attached, portions of the image may appear darker. • When using the filter adapter, be sure to use only one filter at a time. Attaching multiple filters, or accessories such as a heavy lens, may cause the attachments to fall off or damage the camera or adapter. • Do not grip the filter adapter tightly. • Remove the filter adapter when not using a filter. • The filter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the camera at the same time. 192
  • 193.
    Using Optional Accessories Still Images Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) An optional Remote Switch RS60-E3 can be used to avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds. Connect the remote switch. Make sure the camera is off. Open the terminal cover and insert the remote switch plug. Shoot. To shoot, press the release button on the remote switch. PY • Bulb photography (long exposures) is not supported. O C Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) Still Images Movies More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional Speedlite EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the optional Speedlite 320EX flash is available. • This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series functions. • Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not fire at all, in some cases. • Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units) or flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and may damage the camera. • Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional information. 193
  • 194.
    Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies Speedlite 580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of flash photography needs. Attach the flash unit to the hot shoe. Turn the flash on, and then turn the camera on. A red h icon is now displayed. The flash pilot lamp will light up when the flash is ready. Choose shooting mode G, M, PY B, or D. Flash settings can only be configured in O these modes. In other modes, the flash is adjusted and fired automatically, as needed. CSet the white balance to h (p. 100). Configure settings for the external flash. Press the n button, choose [Flash Control] on the 4 tab, and then press the m button. Options already set on the flash itself are displayed. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an item, and then adjust the setting by pressing the qr buttons. Available settings vary depending on the shooting mode and the flash attached (p. 200). 194
  • 195.
    Using Optional Accessories • Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a Speedlite EX series flash is attached, because that setting screen is no longer accessible. • You can also access the setting screen by pressing the r button for at least one second. • Flash settings in shooting mode can be configured just as they are in G mode. • 580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the external flash has been set up for stroboscopic flash. • 320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the icon is shown. Still Images Movies Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately) Using the optional Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 can help prevent unnatural shadows next to subjects during vertical shooting. To keep the LCD screen out of the way of the PY bracket, use the screen closed and facing outward. Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX C O This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography. Requires Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1 (sold separately) for attachment to the Still Images camera. Remove the ring. Make sure the camera is off. Hold down the ring release button ( ) and turn the ring in the direction of the arrow ( ). Align the mark on the ring with the mark on the camera, and then lift the ring off. 195
  • 196.
    Using Optional Accessories Attach the macrolite adapter. Align the mark on the macrolite adapter with the mark on the camera, and then turn the adapter in the direction of the arrows until it locks in place. To remove the adapter, hold down the ring release button and turn the adapter in the opposite direction. Attach the controller to the camera. Attach the control component of the macro ring lite to the hot shoe on top of the camera. PY Attach the flash unit to the macrolite adapter. C O Press the release buttons on both sides of the macro ring lite and attach the macro ring lite to the macrolite adapter. Choose shooting mode G, M, B, or D. Flash settings can only be configured in these modes. In other modes, the flash is adjusted and fired automatically, as needed. Set the white balance to h (p. 100). Enter e mode (p. 105). 196
  • 197.
    Using Optional Accessories Set [ND Filter] to [On] (p. 99). Configure the external flash. Follow step 5 on p. 194 to adjust the settings. • Keep cords (from the macro ring lite) away from flash heads. • When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent them from coming into contact with the flash heads. • Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot be used with these accessories attached. Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX This optional flash unit enables many styles of macro flash photography. Requires Macrolite Adapter MLA-DC1, Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3, and Bracket BKT-DC1 (all sold separately) for attachment to the camera. PY Remove the ring and attach the O macrolite adapter. C Follow steps 1 – 2 on p. 195 to remove the ring, and then attach the macrolite adapter. Attach the off-camera shoe cord to the bracket. Slide the bracket screw to the outer end of the bracket. Align the bracket screw with the tripod socket of the off-camera shoe cord, and then tighten the screw to secure it. 197
  • 198.
    Using Optional Accessories Attach the bracket to the camera. Slide the other bracket screw to the outer end of the bracket. Align the bracket screw with the tripod socket on the bottom of the camera, and then tighten the screw to secure it. Attach the off-camera shoe cord to the camera. Attach the camera connection component of the off-camera shoe cord to the hot shoe on top of the camera. O PY Attach the controller to the off- camera shoe cord. C Attach the controller for the Macro Twin Lite to the flash connection component of the off-camera shoe cord. Attach the flash unit to the macrolite adapter. Attach each flash head to the respective mount ( ). Press the release button on the top of the ring in and attach the ring to the macrolite adapter ( ). 198
  • 199.
    Using Optional Accessories Configure the external flash and settings on the camera. Follow steps 5 – 9 on p. 196 to configure the settings. • Keep cords (from the macro twin lite and off-camera shoe cord) away from flash heads. • When using a tripod, adjust the position of the legs to prevent them from coming into contact with the flash heads or the bracket. • Depending on the position where you have attached the flash controller, it may come into contact with the LCD monitor. To prevent this, adjust the position of attachment or the orientation of the controller, adjust the angle of the screen, or use the screen closed and facing outward. • Use the screen to compose shots, because the viewfinder cannot be PY used with these accessories attached. C O 199
  • 200.
    Using Optional Accessories Still Images Camera Settings Available with an External Flash (Sold Separately) The following settings are available in G, M, B, or D mode. In other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Corr.] and [Red-Eye Lamp] can be configured. (The flash is adjusted and fired automatically, as needed.) Shooting Mode Item Options G M B D Auto*1 — Flash Mode Manual*2 Flash Exp. Comp*3 –3 to +3 — 1/128*5 to 1/1 Flash Output*4 (in 1/3-stop increments) PY Shutter Sync. 1st-curtain/2nd-curtain/Hi-speed On O Slow Synchro Off — — Wireless Func.*6 Red-Eye Corr. Red-Eye Lamp On/Off On/Off On/Off C On — Safety FE*7 Off Clear Flash Settings*8 *1 E-TTL mode is used for the flash. *2 M mode is used for the flash. In D shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case, when the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to the flash output level set on the camera. *3 Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure compensation on the flash, the camera display will be updated (580EX II and 430EX II only). *4 Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the flash unit. *5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX, and Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX. 200
  • 201.
    Using Optional Accessories *6For options other than On/Off, configure the setting on the flash unit itself. Not available with Speedlite 430EX II/320EX/270EX II, Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX, or Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX. When this setting is set to [On], [Shutter Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd- curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it will be changed to [1st-curtain].) *7 Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto]. *8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Slow Synchro], [Safety FE], [Red-Eye Corr.], and [Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] in the 3 menu on the camera (p. 179). • Flash settings in shooting mode can be configured just as they are in G mode. O PY C 201
  • 202.
    Still Images Movies Printing Images Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders for photo development services, and prepare or print images for photobooks. A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information. Still Images Easy Print Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer (sold separately) with the included interface cable (p. 2). Make sure the camera and printer are off. PY Connect the camera to the printer. Open the cover. Holding the smaller cable C O plug in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal. Connect the larger cable plug to the printer. For other connection details, refer to the printer manual. Turn the printer on. Turn the camera on. Press the 1 button to turn the camera on. 202
  • 203.
    Printing Images is displayed. Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image. Print the image. Press the c button. Printing now begins. To print other images, repeat steps 5 – 6 after PY printing is finished. When you are finished printing, turn the camera and printer off and disconnect the C O interface cable. • For Canon PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see p. 185. • RAW images cannot be printed. Still Images Configuring Print Settings Access the printing screen. After following steps 1 – 5 on p. 202 to choose an image, press the m button to access the screen at left. Configure the setting. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an item, and then choose an option by pressing the qr buttons. 203
  • 204.
    Printing Images Default Matches current printer settings. Date Prints images with the date added. File No. Prints images with the file number added. Both Prints images with both the date and file number added. Off — Default Matches current printer settings. Off — Uses information from the time of shooting to print under On optimal settings. Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye. No. of Copies Choose the number of copies to print. Trimming — Specify a desired image area to print (see below). PY Paper — Specify the paper size, layout, and other details (p. 205). Settings C O Cropping Images Before Printing (Trimming) By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area instead of the entire image. Choose [Trimming]. After following step 1 on p. 203 to access the printing screen, choose [Trimming] and press the m button. A cropping frame is now displayed, indicating the image area to print. Adjust the cropping frame as needed. To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. To move the frame, press the opqr buttons. To rotate the frame, turn the 7 dial. When finished, press the m button. 204
  • 205.
    Printing Images Print the image. On the screen in step 1, press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [Print], and then press the m button. • Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some aspect ratios. • Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with [Date Stamp] selected. Choosing Paper Size and Layout Before Printing Choose [Paper Settings]. After following step 1 on p. 203 to access the printing screen, choose [Paper Settings] and press the m button. O PY Choose a paper size. C Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an option, and then press the m button. Choose a type of paper. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an option, and then press the m button. 205
  • 206.
    Printing Images Choose a layout. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an option. When choosing [N-up], press the qr buttons to specify the number of images per sheet. Press the m button. Print the image. Available Layout Options Default Matches current printer settings. Bordered Prints with blank space around the image. Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing. PY N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet. Prints images for identification purposes. ID Photo O Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of 4:3. Choose the print size. C Fixed Size Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints. Printing ID Photos Choose [ID Photo]. Following steps 1 – 4 on p. 205, choose [ID Photo] and press the m button. Choose the long and short side length. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an item. Choose the length by pressing the qr buttons, and then press the m button. 206
  • 207.
    Printing Images Choose the printing area. Follow step 2 on p. 204 to choose the printing area. Print the image. Movies Printing Movie Scenes Access the printing screen. Follow steps 1 – 5 on p. 202 to choose a PY movie, and then press the m button. Press the qr buttons to choose c, and then press the m button. The screen at left is C O displayed. Choose a printing method. Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose , and then press the qr buttons to choose the printing method. Print the image. Movie Printing Options Single Prints the current scene as a still image. Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of Sequence paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On]. • To cancel printing in progress, press the m button. • [ID Photo] and [Sequence] are not available with Canon PictBridge-compatible printer models earlier than CP720 and CP730. 207
  • 208.
    Printing Images Still Images Adding Images to Print Orders (DPOF) Batch printing (p. 211) and ordering prints from a photo development service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards. • RAW images cannot be included in print orders. Adding Images to Print Orders via the c Button You can add images to print orders (DPOF) after your shot or later during playback simply by pressing the c button. PY Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to O choose an image. C Add the image to the print list. Press the c button. Press the op buttons to specify the number of prints. Choose [Add] by pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7 dial, and then press the m button. To remove the image from the print order, repeat steps 1 – 2 but choose [Remove] by pressing the qr buttons or turning the 7 dial, and then press the m button. • Print orders cannot be set up while the camera is connected to a printer. 208
  • 209.
    Printing Images Configuring Print Settings Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print order. Press the n button, and then choose [Print Settings] on the 2 tab. Choose and configure settings as desired (p. 41). Standard One image is printed per sheet. Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per Print Type Index sheet. PY Both Both standard and index formats are printed. On Images are printed with the shooting date. Date O Off — On Images are printed with the file number. C File No. Off — All image print order settings are cleared after Clear DPOF On printing. data Off — • Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the printer or photo development service, in some cases. • may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. • Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date twice. • Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File No.] at the same time. • The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/Time] on the 3 tab, accessible by pressing the n button (p. 18). • Index printing is not available on some Canon PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately). 209
  • 210.
    Printing Images SettingUp Printing for Individual Images Choose [Select Images & Qty.]. Press the n button, choose [Select Images & Qty.] on the 2 tab, and then press the m button. Choose an image. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose an image, and then press the m button. You can now specify the number of copies. If you specify index printing for the image, it is labeled with a icon. To cancel index printing for the image, press the m button PY again. is no longer displayed. Specify the number of prints. O Press the op buttons or turn the 7 dial to specify the number of prints (up to 99). CTo set up printing for other images and specify the number of prints, repeat steps 2 – 3. Printing quantity cannot be specified for index prints. You can only choose which images to print, by following step 2. When finished, press the n button to return to the menu screen. Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images Choose [Select Range]. Following step 1 above, choose [Select Range] and press the m button. Choose images. Follow steps 2 – 3 on p. 150 to specify images. 210
  • 211.
    Printing Images Configure the print settings. Press the op buttons to choose [Order], and then press the m button. Setting Up Printing for All Images Choose [Select All Images]. Following step 1 on p. 210, choose [Select All Images] and press the m button. Configure the print settings. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. Clearing All Print Orders Choose [Clear All Selections]. PY Following step 1 on p. 210, choose [Clear All Selections] and press the m button. C O Confirm clearing the order. Press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial to choose [OK], and then press the m button. Printing Images Added to Print Orders (DPOF) When images have been added to the print list (pp. 208 – 211), the screen at left is displayed after you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press the op buttons to choose [Print now], and then simply press the m button to print the images in the print list. Any DPOF print job that you temporarily stop will be resumed from the next image. 211
  • 212.
    Still Images Movies Using an Eye-Fi Card Before using an Eye-Fi card, always confirm that local use is permitted (p. 3). Inserting a prepared Eye-Fi card enables automatic wireless transfer of images to a computer or uploading to a photo-sharing website. Images are transferred by the Eye-Fi card. Refer to the card’s user manual or contact the manufacturer for instructions on preparing and using cards or resolving transfer problems. • When using an Eye-Fi card, keep the following points in mind. • Cards may continue to transmit radio waves even when [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable] (p. 213). Remove the Eye-Fi card before entering hospitals, aircraft, or other areas where transmission is prohibited. • When troubleshooting image transfer issues, check the card and computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s user manual. • Poor wireless connections may cause image transfer to take a long PY time, and transfer may be interrupted in some cases. • Eye-Fi cards may become hot, due to their transfer functions. O • Battery power will be consumed faster than in normal use. • Camera operation may become sluggish. To resolve this, try setting C [Eye-Fi trans.] to [Disable]. Connection status of Eye-Fi cards in the camera can be checked on the shooting screen (in regular information display mode) or playback screen (in simple information display mode). (Gray) Not connected (Blinking white) Connecting (White) Connected (Animated) Transfer in progress Interrupted Error acquiring Eye-Fi card information (Restart the camera. Repeated display of this icon may indicate a problem with the card.) Images labeled with a icon have been transferred. 212
  • 213.
    Using an Eye-FiCard • Power saving (p. 36) on the camera is temporarily disabled during image transfer. • Choosing mode will interrupt the Eye-Fi connection. Although the Eye-Fi connection will be restored after you choose another shooting mode or enter Playback mode, the camera may transfer any movies made in mode again. Checking Connection Information Check the access point SSID used by the Eye-Fi card or the connection status, as needed. Press the n button, choose [Eye-Fi Settings] on the 3 tab, and then press the m button. Choose [Connection info], and then press the m button. The connection information screen is PY displayed. O Disabling Eye-Fi Transfer C Configure the setting as follows to disable Eye-Fi transfer by the card, if necessary. Choose [Disable] in [Eye-Fi trans.]. Press the n button, choose [Eye-Fi Settings] on the 3 tab, and then press the m button. Choose [Eye-Fi trans.], and then choose [Disable]. • [Eye-Fi Settings] is not shown unless an Eye-Fi card is in the camera with its write-protect tab in the unlocked position. For this reason, you cannot change settings for an inserted Eye-Fi card if the write-protect tab is in the locked position. 213
  • 214.
    Using an Eye-FiCard O PY C 214
  • 215.
    9 Appendix Helpful informationwhen using the camera O PY C 215
  • 216.
    Troubleshooting If you thinkthere is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Power Nothing happens when the power button is pressed. • Confirm that you are using the correct type of battery, and that there is sufficient charge (p. 223). • Confirm that the battery is inserted facing the correct way (p. 15). • Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (p. 16). • Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery a few times. The battery is depleted quickly. • Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, with the terminal cover on. • If these measures do not help and the battery is still depleted soon after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery. The lens is not retracted. PY • Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (p. 16). The battery is swollen. O • Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery C swelling prevents the battery from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Display on a TV Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (p. 187). Shooting Cannot shoot. • In Playback mode (p. 20), press the shutter button halfway (p. 37). Nothing is displayed (p. 46). Strange display on the screen under low light (p. 39). Strange display on the screen when shooting. Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded in movies. • The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED lighting. 216
  • 217.
    Troubleshooting h flashes onthe screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting is not possible (p. 47). is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (p. 46). • Set [IS mode] to [Continuous] (p. 120). • Raise the flash and set the flash mode to h (p. 116). • Increase the ISO speed (p. 95). • Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (p. 120). Shots are out of focus. • Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way down to shoot (p. 37). • Make sure subjects are within focusing range (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide). • Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (p. 65). • Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated. • Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (pp. 109, 114). No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway. PY • To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly. O Subjects in shots look too dark. Raise the flash and set the flash mode to h (p. 116). C • • Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (p. 93). • Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (pp. 98, 163). • Use spot metering or AE lock (pp. 93, 94). Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out. • Lower the flash and set the flash mode to ! (p. 45). • Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (p. 93). • Use spot metering or AE lock (pp. 93, 94). • Reduce the lighting on subjects. Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (p. 46). • Shoot within flash range (p. 116). • Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level (pp. 117, 127). • Increase the ISO speed (p. 95). Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out. • Shoot within flash range (p. 116). • Lower the flash and set the flash mode to ! (p. 45). • Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level (pp. 117, 127). White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots. • This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles. 217
  • 218.
    Troubleshooting Shots look grainy. •Lower the ISO speed (p. 95). • High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (p. 70). Subjects are affected by red-eye (p. 58). • Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (p. 65) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp (p. 4) in flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range. • Edit images using red-eye correction (p. 164). Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is slower. • Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (p. 172). Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available. • Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Menu” (pp. 226 – 233). Shooting Movies Cannot shoot movies (p. 17). PY The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted. • Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of movies O on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (p. 171). is displayed and shooting stops automatically. C The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures. • Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (p. 172). • Lower the image quality (p. 60). • Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide). Zooming is not possible. • Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in modes that do not support digital zoom. • Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in mode. Subjects look distorted. • Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a malfunction. Playback Playback is not possible. • Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or alter the folder structure. Refer to the Software Guide for details on folder structure and file names. 218
  • 219.
    Troubleshooting Playback stops, oraudio skips. • Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the camera (p. 172). • There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that have slow read speeds. • When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate. Computer Cannot transfer images to a computer. When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the transfer speed as follows. • Press the 1 button to enter Playback mode. Hold the n button down as you press the o and m buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press the qr buttons to choose [B], and then press the m button. Eye-Fi Cards PY Cannot transfer images (p. 212). C O 219
  • 220.
    On-Screen Messages If anerror message is displayed, respond as follows. No memory card • The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card facing the correct way (p. 16). Memory card locked • The write-protect tab of the SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card or Eye-Fi card is set to the locked position. Switch the write-protect tab to the unlocked position (p. 15). Cannot record! • Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a memory card facing the correct way (p. 16). Memory card error (p. 172) • If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk (p. 16). Insufficient space on card • There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (pp. 43, 67, 91, 123) or PY edit images (pp. 160 – 164). Either erase unneeded images (pp. 152) or insert a memory card with enough free space (see “Specifications” in the Getting Started guide). Change the battery pack. (p. 15) No Image. C O • The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed. Protected! (p. 148) Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back AVI/RAW • Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed. • It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot register this image!/Cannot modify/ Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image. • The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*) functions are not available for movies. Magnify* (p. 145), Smart Shuffle* (p. 147), Categorize (p. 157), Rotate (p. 155), Edit* (pp. 160 – 164), Assign as Start-up Image* (p. 171), and Print Order* (p. 208). • Grouped images cannot be processed (p. 85). Invalid selection range • When specifying a range for image selection (pp. 150, 153, 159, 210), you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa. 220
  • 221.
    On-Screen Messages Exceeded selectionlimit • More than 998 images were selected for Print Order (p. 208). Choose 998 images or less. • Print Order (p. 208) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again. • You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (p. 148), Erase (p. 152), Favorites (p. 157), My Category (p. 158), or Print Order (p. 208). Communication error • An excessive amount of images (approx. 1,000) on the memory card prevented printing or image transfer to a computer. To transfer the images, use a commercially available USB card reader. To print, insert the memory card directly into the printer card slot. Naming error! • When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) has been reached, new folders cannot be created, and images cannot be recorded. In the 3 menu, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (p. 173), or format the memory card (p. 171). PY Lens Error • This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used in dusty or sandy locations. O • Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. C A camera error was detected (error number) • If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image. • Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. File Error • It may not be possible to print computer-edited images or images shot with another camera. Print error • Check the paper size setting. If this error message is displayed when the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again. Ink absorber full • Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber replacement. 221
  • 222.
    On-Screen Information Shooting (Information Display) PY Battery level (p. 223) Digital zoom Grid lines (p. 128) Camera orientation* magnification (p. 51), Shutter speed (pp. 124, White balance correction Digital tele-converter 126) O (p. 101) (p. 107) Electronic level (p. 176) My Colors (p. 102) Focusing range (pp. 105, Aperture value (pp. 125, C AEB shooting (p. 97) / 106), AF lock (p. 114), IS 126) Focus bracketing mode icon (p. 49) Exposure compensation (p. 115) Shooting mode (p. 226), level (p. 93) Drive mode (p. 104) Scene icon (p. 48) i-Contrast (p. 98) Eye-Fi connection status Flash mode (p. 116), White balance (p. 100) (p. 212) LED light (p. 195) Mercury lamp correction Metering method (p. 94) AF frame (p. 108) (p. 59) Still image compression Red-eye correction Camera shake warning (p. 58), Resolution (p. 58) (p. 46) (p. 57) Flash exposure Exposure shift bar Histogram (p. 138) compensation / Flash Zoom bar (p. 44) Recordable shots output level (pp. 117, Blink detection (p. 64) Self-timer (p. 52) 127) Exposure level (p. 126) Movie quality (p. 60) Spot AE point frame MF indicator (p. 106) Focal length (p. 105) (p. 94) Image stabilization Remaining time Date stamp (p. 54) (p. 120) ISO speed (p. 95) Time zone (p. 175) ND filter (p. 99) Wind filter (p. 61) AE lock (p. 93), FE lock Exposure compensation (p. 118) bar (p. 93) 222
  • 223.
    On-Screen Information * : Regular orientation, : Held vertically The camera detects the shooting orientation and adjusts settings for optimal shots. Orientation is also detected during playback, and in either orientation, the camera automatically rotates images as needed. However, the orientation may not be detected correctly when the camera is pointed straight up or down. Battery Level An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level. Display Details Sufficient charge Slightly depleted, but sufficient (Blinking red) Nearly depleted—charge the battery soon [Change the battery pack.] Depleted—charge the battery immediately O PY C 223
  • 224.
    On-Screen Information Playback (Detailed Information Display) Switch display (RGB Battery level (p. 223) File size histogram) (p. 139) Metering method (p. 94) Still images: Resolution My Category (p. 158) Folder number - File Movies: Movie length PY Exposure compensation number (p. 173) Compression (image level (p. 93), Exposure Current image no. / Total quality) (p. 58) / shift level (p. 88) no. of images Resolution (p. 57), RAW O ND filter (p. 99) Shutter speed (still (p. 119), MOV (movies) C White balance (p. 100), images) (p. 124), Image Group playback (p. 144), White balance correction quality / Frame rate Image editing (pp. 160 – (p. 101), Mercury lamp (movies) (p. 60) 164) correction (p. 59) Aperture value (pp. 125, Protection (p. 148) Histogram (p. 138) 126) Favorite (p. 157) Print order (p. 208) i-Contrast (pp. 98, 163) My Colors (pp. 102, 162) ISO speed (p. 95), Flash (p. 116), Flash Red-eye correction Playback speed (p. 75) exposure compensation (pp. 58, 164) Shooting mode (p. 226) (p. 117) Shooting date/time Transferred via Eye-Fi Focusing range (pp. 105, (p. 18) (p. 212) 106) Movie (pp. 44, 136) High-speed burst HQ (p. 85) • Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (p. 186). 224
  • 225.
    On-Screen Information Summary of Movie Control Panel in “Viewing” (p. 136) Exit Play Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the qr buttons or turn the 7 dial. No sound is played.) Skip Backward* (To continue skipping backward, keep holding down the m button.) Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the m button.) Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the m button.) Skip Forward* (To continue skipping forward, keep holding down the m button.) * Edit (p. 165) PY Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer c (p. 202). O * Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame. C • To skip forward or back during movie playback, press the qr buttons. 225
  • 226.
    Functions and MenuTables Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode Shooting Mode K D BM G A I J V Function Exposure Compensation (p. 93) *1 *1 — — *1 *1 — ISO Speed (p. 95) – *1 *1 — — — — White Balance Correction (p. 101) *1 *1 — — — — — *1 *1 — — — h *1 *1 — Flash (p. 116)*3 Z *1 *1 — — *4 — *5 — ! *1 *1 *1 *1 Metering Method (p. 94) *1 *1 — — — — Shutter Speed (p. 124) *1 *1 — — — — — — — Aperture Value (p. 125) *1 *1 — — — — — — — PY Program Shift (p. 93) — — — — — AE Lock (p. 93)/FE Lock (p. 118) — — — — — AE Lock (Movie)/Exposure Shift (p. 88) — — — — — — — — — — — O AF Lock (when registered to the button) (p. 131) — — C *1 *1 Focusing Range (pp. 105, 106) e *1 *1 — — /AF Lock *1 *1 — — Change AF Frame Position (p. 110) *1 *1 — — — — — Change AF Frame Size (p. 110) *1 *1 — Face Select (p. 113) Tracking AF (pp. 55, 111) — Off *1 *1 — Screen Display (p. 39) Display 1 *1 *1 Display 2 *1 *1 FUNC. Menu *1 *1 — DR Correction (p. 98) *1 *1 — — — — — *1 *1 — — — — — *1 *1 — Shadow Correct (p. 99) *1 *1 — — — *1 The available settings depend on the registered shooting modes. *2 Detailed settings not available. *3 Fixed to ! when the flash is lowered, but selectable when the flash is raised. 226
  • 227.
    Functions and MenuTables K E x T w S O P t E v Y — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — *2 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PY — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O — — — — — C — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — FUNC. Menu — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — *4 Not available, but switches to Z in some cases. *5 Not available, but switches to Z when the flash fires. Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable. 227
  • 228.
    Functions and MenuTables Shooting Mode K D BM G A I J V Function *1 *1 *1 *1 — — — — White Balance (p. 100) h *1 *1 — — — — S *1 *1 — — — — *2 *1 *1 — — — — *1 *1 *3 My Colors (p. 102) *3 *1 *1 — — — — *4 *1 *1 Bracketing (pp. 115, 97) *1 *1 — — — — — — *1 *1 — — — — — *1 *1 Drive Mode (p. 104) W *1 *1 — — PY *5 *1 *1 — — *1 *1 ] *1 *1 O Self-Timer (p. 52) [ *1 *1 C $ *1 *1 Delay*6 *1 *1 Self-Timer Settings (p. 53) Shots*7 *1 *1 — Flash Exposure Compensation (p. 117) *1 *1 — — — — — Flash Output Level (p. 127) *1 *1 — — — — — — *1 *1 — — — — ND Filter (p. 99) *1 *1 Still Image Aspect Ratio (p. 56) *1 *1 — Image Type (p. 119) *1 *1 — — — — — *1 *1 Resolution (p. 57) *1 *1 Compression (p. 58) *1 *1 *1 *1 Movie Quality (p. 60) *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 The available settings depend on the registered shooting modes. *2 Not available in x or v. *3 White balance is not available. *4 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone. *5 is set with , AF lock, or t. 228
  • 229.
    Functions and MenuTables K E x T w S O P t E v Y — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PY — — — — — — — — — — — — — — O — — — — — C — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — *8 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — *9 *9 — *6 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots. *7 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots. *8 Only and are available. *9 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (p. 56). Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable. 229
  • 230.
    Functions and MenuTables 4 Shooting Menu Shooting Mode K D BM G A I J V Function Face AiAF *1 *1 AF Frame (p. 108) Tracking AF *1 *1 *2 — FlexiZone/Center*2 *1 *1 — Standard *1 *1 Off *1 *1 Digital Zoom (pp. 51, 107) Digital Tele-converter *1 *1 — — — — — 1.5x/1.9x On *1 *1 — — AF-Point Zoom (p. 63) *1 *1 Off On *1 *1 — — Servo AF (p. 112) Off*4 *1 *1 — PY On *1 *1 — Continuous AF (p. 113) *1 *1 Off — — On *1 *1 AF-assist Beam (p. 65) O Off *1 *1 On *1 *1 — — — MF-Point Zoom (p. 106) C Off *1 *1 On *1 *1 — — Safety MF (p. 106) *1 *1 Off Auto *1 *1 — Flash Mode Manual *1 *1 — — — — — — Flash Exp. Comp *1 *1 — — — — — Flash Output *1 *1 — — — — — — *1 *1 Shutter 1st-curtain Flash Control (pp. 58, 65, Sync. *1 *1 2nd-curtain — — — — 117, 118, 127) *1 *1 Red-Eye On Corr. Off *1 *1 *1 *1 Red-Eye On Lamp Off *1 *1 On *1 *1 — Safety FE Off *1 *1 — — — — Max ISO Speed *1 *1 — — — — — ISO Auto Settings (p. 95) *1 *1 Rate of Change — — — — — — High ISO NR (p. 96) Low / Standard / High *1 *1 — — — — — 230
  • 231.
    Functions and MenuTables K E x T w S O P t E v Y — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PY — — — — — — — — — — O — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — C — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable. 231
  • 232.
    Functions and MenuTables Shooting Mode K D BM G A I J V Function Hg Lamp Corr. (p. 59) On/Off* — — — — — — — — — — Center *1 *1 — — — — Spot AE Point (p. 94) *1 *1 AF Point — — — — — On *1 *1 — — — — — — — Safety Shift (p. 125) Off *1 *1 On *1 *1 Wind Filter (p. 61) Off *1 *1 Off *1 *1 2 sec. *1 *1 Review (p. 66) 3 – 10 sec. *1 *1 Hold *1 *1 PY Off *1 *1 Review Info (p. 66) Detailed *1 *1 Focus Check *1 *1 O On *1 *1 Blink Detection (p. 64) *1 *1 Off C Shooting Info *1 *1 Grid Lines *1 *1 Custom Display (p. 128) *1 *1 Electronic Level Histogram *1 *1 On *1 *1 Reverse Disp. (p. 17) *1 *1 Off Off *1 *1 IS Mode Continuous *1 *1 IS Settings (p. 120) Shoot Only *1 *1 — *1 *1 Powered On IS Off *1 *1 Off *1 *1 Date Stamp (p. 54) Date *1 *1 Date & Time *1 *1 Set z7 Func. (p. 129) *1 *1 — — — — — Set Shortcut button (p. 131) *1 *1 Save Settings (p. 132) — — — — — *1 The available settings depend on the registered shooting modes. *2 Only available by pressing the o button (p. 108). *3 [FlexiZone] in G, M, B and D modes, and [Center] in all other modes. 232
  • 233.
    Functions and MenuTables K E x T w S O P t E v Y — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — PY — — — — — — — — O — — — — — — — — — — — — — C — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — *4 [On] when subject movement is detected in A mode. Selectable, or set automatically. — Not selectable. 233
  • 234.
    Functions and MenuTables 3 Set up Menu Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page Mute p. 168 Time Zone p. 175 Volume p. 168 Date/Time p. 19 Sound Options p. 169 Distance Units p. 176 Hints & Tips p. 169 Electronic Level p. 176 LCD Brightness p. 170 Video System p. 187 Start-up Image p. 170 Ctrl via HDMI p. 188 Format pp. 171, 172 Eye-Fi Settings p. 212 File Numbering p. 173 Copyright Info p. 177 Create Folder p. 173 Language p. 20 PY Lens Retract p. 174 Reset All p. 179 Power Saving pp. 36, 174 My Menu Menu Item C O Ref. Page My Menu settings p. 133 234
  • 235.
    Functions and MenuTables 1 Playback Menu Item Ref. Page Item Ref. Page Movie Digest Playback p. 143 Red-Eye Correction p. 164 Smart Shuffle p. 147 Trimming p. 161 Slideshow p. 146 Resize p. 160 Erase p. 152 My Colors p. 162 Protect p. 148 Scroll Display p. 137 Rotate p. 155 Group Images p. 144 Favorites p. 157 Auto Rotate p. 155 My Category p. 158 Resume p. 137 i-Contrast p. 163 Transition p. 137 PY 2 Print Menu Print Item Select Images & Qty. Ref. Page C — p. 210 O Item Select All Images Clear All Selections Ref. Page p. 211 p. 211 Select Range p. 210 Print Settings p. 209 235
  • 236.
    Handling Precautions • Thecamera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact. • Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or erase image data. • If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force. • Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or screen. • Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. • To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag. • If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately. PY Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the battery and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use. C O 236
  • 237.
    Index A DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk ................ 2 AC adapter kit.......................................... 189 Digital tele-converter................................ 107 Accessories ............................................. 182 Digital zoom...............................................51 AEB mode ................................................. 97 Display language .......................................20 AE lock ...................................................... 93 DPOF....................................................... 208 AF frames ............................ 22, 45, 108, 110 Drive mode .............................................. 104 AF Focusing Dynamic Range Correction .......................98 AF lock..................................................... 114 Aspect ratio................................................ 56 E AUTO mode (shooting mode)........ 21, 39, 44 Editing Av (shooting mode) ................................. 125 Cropping ...........................................161 AV cable .................................................. 186 i-Contrast .......................................... 163 My Colors.......................................... 162 B Red-eye correction ........................... 164 Battery Resizing images ............................... 160 Charging ............................................. 14 Erasing ....................................................152 Level ................................................. 223 Erasing all................................................152 Power saving ...................................... 36 Error messages .......................................220 PY Black and white images..................... 73, 102 Exposure Blink detection ........................................... 64 AE lock................................................93 Compensation.....................................93 C FE lock.............................................. 118 O C1/C2 (shooting mode) ........................... 132 Eye-Fi cards ........................................2, 212 C Camera Reset all............................................ 179 F Camera shake ......................................... 120 Face AiAF (AF frame mode)....................108 Clock.......................................................... 42 Face select .............................................. 113 Color (white balance)............................... 100 Face self-timer (shooting mode)................84 Color Accent (shooting mode) ................... 78 Favorites.................................................. 157 Color Swap (shooting mode) ..................... 79 FE lock.....................................................118 Compression ratio (image quality)............. 58 File numbering......................................... 173 Continuous shooting................................ 104 Fireworks (shooting mode) ........................70 High-speed burst HQ Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) ................74 (shooting mode).................................. 85 Flash Creative filters (shooting mode)................. 71 Flash exposure compensation..........117 Cropping .................................................. 161 On .....................................................116 Custom white balance ............................. 101 Slow synchro .................................... 116 FlexiZone (AF frame mode)..................... 109 D Focus bracketing ..................................... 115 Date/time Focus check ............................................139 Adding date/time to images ................ 54 Focusing Changing ............................................ 19 AF frames ......................................... 108 Setting ................................................ 18 AF lock.............................................. 114 World clock ....................................... 175 AF-point zoom ....................................63 Defaults Reset all Face select .......................................113 237
  • 238.
    Index Servo AF........................................... 112 Image quality (resolution/frame rate).. 60 Focusing range Multi-area White Balance .......................... 59 Macro................................................ 105 My Category ............................................ 158 Manual focus .................................... 106 My Colors ........................................ 102, 162 Focus lock ............................................... 109 FUNC. menu N Basic operations ................................. 40 ND filter ..................................................... 99 Nostalgic (shooting mode)......................... 73 H Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)...... 69 P High dynamic range (shooting mode) ....... 72 P (shooting mode) ..................................... 92 High-speed burst HQ (shooting mode)...... 85 Package Contents ....................................... 2 Household power .................................... 189 PictBridge ........................................ 185, 202 Playback Viewing I Portrait (shooting mode)............................ 68 i-Contrast........................................... 98, 163 Poster effect (shooting mode) ................... 71 Image quality Compression ratio Powered IS.............................................. 121 Images Power Battery, AC adapter kit Display period..................................... 66 Power saving............................................. 36 PY Erasing ............................................. 152 Printing .................................................... 202 Playback Viewing Program AE............................................... 92 Protecting ......................................... 148 Protecting ................................................ 148 O Indicator..................................................... 42 R C Interface cable............................... 2, 29, 202 ISO speed ................................................. 95 RAW ........................................................ 119 Red-eye correction ............................ 58, 164 L Reset all .................................................. 179 Lamp ......................................................... 65 Resizing images ...................................... 160 Language display ...................................... 20 Resolution (image size)............................. 57 Rotating ................................................... 155 M M (shooting mode) .................................. 126 S Macro (focus mode) ................................ 105 Screen Magnified display..................................... 145 Icons ......................................... 222, 224 Manual focus (focus mode) ..................... 106 Language display ............................... 20 Memory cards.............................................. 2 Menu FUNC. menu, Menu Menu SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards Memory Basic operations ................................. 41 cards Table................................................. 226 Self-timer ................................................... 52 Metering method ....................................... 94 2-second self-timer ............................. 53 Miniature effect (shooting mode)............... 74 Customizing the self-timer .................. 53 Monochrome (shooting mode) .................. 77 Face self-timer (shooting mode)......... 84 Movie Digest (shooting mode)................... 81 Wink self-timer (shooting mode)......... 83 Movies Sepia tone images............................. 73, 102 Editing............................................... 165 Servo AF ................................................. 112 238
  • 239.
    Index Shadow Correct......................................... 99 World clock .............................................. 175 Shooting Shooting date/time Date/time Z Shooting information................. 128, 222 Zoom ............................................. 21, 44, 51 Slideshow ................................................ 146 Smart Shuffle........................................... 147 Smart Shutter (shooting mode) ................. 82 Smile (shooting mode)............................... 82 Snow (shooting mode)............................... 70 Software DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk ......... 2 Installation........................................... 28 Sounds .................................................... 168 Sports (shooting mode) ............................. 69 Stereo AV cable....................................... 186 Stitch Assist (shooting mode) .................... 87 Super vivid (shooting mode)...................... 71 T PY Terminal..................... 29, 186, 187, 189, 202 Toy camera effect (shooting mode)........... 76 Tracking AF ....................................... 55, 111 O Traveling with the camera ............... 175, 182 C Troubleshooting....................................... 216 Tv (shooting mode).................................. 124 TV display................................................ 186 U Underwater (shooting mode) ..................... 69 V Viewfinder.................................................. 38 Viewing Filtered playback............................... 141 Index display..................................... 141 Magnified display .............................. 145 Single-image display........................... 24 Slideshow ......................................... 146 Smart Shuffle .................................... 147 TV display ......................................... 186 W White balance (color)............................... 100 Widescreen (resolution)............................. 57 Wink self-timer (shooting mode)................ 83 239
  • 240.
    FCC Notice (Digital Camera,Model PC1674 systems) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. PY • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. O The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC C rules. Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment. Canon U.S.A., Inc. One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A. Tel No. (516) 328-5600 Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. To ensure proper operation of this product, use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended. USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. 240
  • 241.
    For CA, USAonly Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details. Battery Charger CB-2LC IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed. Battery Charger CB-2LCE PY The adapter can be used with a power supply between 100 and 240 V AC. Contact your Canon dealer for information about plug adapter for overseas use. O For U.S.A. customers only: For areas where 120 V AC power is not used, you will need a special plug adapter. C For only United States Use a UL listed, 1.8-3m(6-10ft), Type SPT-2 or NTSPT-2, AWG no.18 power supply cord, rated for 125V 7A, with a non-polarized NEMA 1-15P plug rated for 125V 15A. Trademark Acknowledgments • The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. • This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft. • HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. • The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple INC. About MPEG-4 Licensing This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard. * Notice displayed in English as required. 241
  • 242.
    Disclaimer • Reprinting, transmitting,or storing in a retrieval system any part of this guide without the permission of Canon is prohibited. • Canon reserves the right to change the contents of this guide at any time without prior notice. PY • Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment. • The above items notwithstanding, Canon accepts no liability for O damages due to mistaken operation of the products. C CDD-E451-020 © CANON INC. 2012